| 1 | /**************************************************************************** | 
|---|
| 2 | ** | 
|---|
| 3 | ** Copyright (C) 2011 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). | 
|---|
| 4 | ** All rights reserved. | 
|---|
| 5 | ** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) | 
|---|
| 6 | ** | 
|---|
| 7 | ** This file is part of the QtGui module of the Qt Toolkit. | 
|---|
| 8 | ** | 
|---|
| 9 | ** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ | 
|---|
| 10 | ** Commercial Usage | 
|---|
| 11 | ** Licensees holding valid Qt Commercial licenses may use this file in | 
|---|
| 12 | ** accordance with the Qt Commercial License Agreement provided with the | 
|---|
| 13 | ** Software or, alternatively, in accordance with the terms contained in | 
|---|
| 14 | ** a written agreement between you and Nokia. | 
|---|
| 15 | ** | 
|---|
| 16 | ** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage | 
|---|
| 17 | ** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser | 
|---|
| 18 | ** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software | 
|---|
| 19 | ** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the | 
|---|
| 20 | ** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to | 
|---|
| 21 | ** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements | 
|---|
| 22 | ** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. | 
|---|
| 23 | ** | 
|---|
| 24 | ** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain additional | 
|---|
| 25 | ** rights.  These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL Exception | 
|---|
| 26 | ** version 1.1, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this package. | 
|---|
| 27 | ** | 
|---|
| 28 | ** GNU General Public License Usage | 
|---|
| 29 | ** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU | 
|---|
| 30 | ** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software | 
|---|
| 31 | ** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the | 
|---|
| 32 | ** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to | 
|---|
| 33 | ** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be | 
|---|
| 34 | ** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. | 
|---|
| 35 | ** | 
|---|
| 36 | ** If you have questions regarding the use of this file, please contact | 
|---|
| 37 | ** Nokia at qt-info@nokia.com. | 
|---|
| 38 | ** $QT_END_LICENSE$ | 
|---|
| 39 | ** | 
|---|
| 40 | ****************************************************************************/ | 
|---|
| 41 |  | 
|---|
| 42 | #include "qstyleoption.h" | 
|---|
| 43 | #include "qapplication.h" | 
|---|
| 44 | #ifdef Q_WS_MAC | 
|---|
| 45 | # include "private/qt_mac_p.h" | 
|---|
| 46 | # include "qmacstyle_mac.h" | 
|---|
| 47 | #endif | 
|---|
| 48 | #include <qdebug.h> | 
|---|
| 49 | #include <QtCore/qmath.h> | 
|---|
| 50 |  | 
|---|
| 51 | QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE | 
|---|
| 52 |  | 
|---|
| 53 | /*! | 
|---|
| 54 | \class QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 55 | \brief The QStyleOption class stores the parameters used by QStyle functions. | 
|---|
| 56 |  | 
|---|
| 57 | \ingroup appearance | 
|---|
| 58 |  | 
|---|
| 59 | QStyleOption and its subclasses contain all the information that | 
|---|
| 60 | QStyle functions need to draw a graphical element. | 
|---|
| 61 |  | 
|---|
| 62 | For performance reasons, there are few member functions and the | 
|---|
| 63 | access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the \c . or | 
|---|
| 64 | \c -> operator). This low-level feel makes the structures | 
|---|
| 65 | straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply | 
|---|
| 66 | parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 67 |  | 
|---|
| 68 | The caller of a QStyle function usually creates QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 69 | objects on the stack. This combined with Qt's extensive use of | 
|---|
| 70 | \l{implicit sharing} for types such as QString, QPalette, and | 
|---|
| 71 | QColor ensures that no memory allocation needlessly takes place. | 
|---|
| 72 |  | 
|---|
| 73 | The following code snippet shows how to use a specific | 
|---|
| 74 | QStyleOption subclass to paint a push button: | 
|---|
| 75 |  | 
|---|
| 76 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 0 | 
|---|
| 77 |  | 
|---|
| 78 | In our example, the control is a QStyle::CE_PushButton, and | 
|---|
| 79 | according to the QStyle::drawControl() documentation the | 
|---|
| 80 | corresponding class is QStyleOptionButton. | 
|---|
| 81 |  | 
|---|
| 82 | When reimplementing QStyle functions that take a QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 83 | parameter, you often need to cast the QStyleOption to a subclass. | 
|---|
| 84 | For safety, you can use qstyleoption_cast() to ensure that the | 
|---|
| 85 | pointer type is correct. For example: | 
|---|
| 86 |  | 
|---|
| 87 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 4 | 
|---|
| 88 |  | 
|---|
| 89 | The qstyleoption_cast() function will return 0 if the object to | 
|---|
| 90 | which \c option points is not of the correct type. | 
|---|
| 91 |  | 
|---|
| 92 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 93 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 94 |  | 
|---|
| 95 | \sa QStyle, QStylePainter | 
|---|
| 96 | */ | 
|---|
| 97 |  | 
|---|
| 98 | /*! | 
|---|
| 99 | \enum QStyleOption::OptionType | 
|---|
| 100 |  | 
|---|
| 101 | This enum is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 102 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 103 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 104 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 105 |  | 
|---|
| 106 | \value SO_Button \l QStyleOptionButton | 
|---|
| 107 | \value SO_ComboBox \l QStyleOptionComboBox | 
|---|
| 108 | \value SO_Complex \l QStyleOptionComplex | 
|---|
| 109 | \value SO_Default QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 110 | \value SO_DockWidget \l QStyleOptionDockWidget | 
|---|
| 111 | \value SO_FocusRect \l QStyleOptionFocusRect | 
|---|
| 112 | \value SO_Frame \l QStyleOptionFrame \l QStyleOptionFrameV2 | 
|---|
| 113 | \value SO_GraphicsItem \l QStyleOptionGraphicsItem | 
|---|
| 114 | \value SO_GroupBox \l QStyleOptionGroupBox | 
|---|
| 115 | \value SO_Header \l QStyleOptionHeader | 
|---|
| 116 | \value SO_MenuItem \l QStyleOptionMenuItem | 
|---|
| 117 | \value SO_ProgressBar \l QStyleOptionProgressBar \l QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 | 
|---|
| 118 | \value SO_RubberBand \l QStyleOptionRubberBand | 
|---|
| 119 | \value SO_SizeGrip \l QStyleOptionSizeGrip | 
|---|
| 120 | \value SO_Slider \l QStyleOptionSlider | 
|---|
| 121 | \value SO_SpinBox \l QStyleOptionSpinBox | 
|---|
| 122 | \value SO_Tab \l QStyleOptionTab | 
|---|
| 123 | \value SO_TabBarBase \l QStyleOptionTabBarBase | 
|---|
| 124 | \value SO_TabWidgetFrame \l QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame | 
|---|
| 125 | \value SO_TitleBar \l QStyleOptionTitleBar | 
|---|
| 126 | \value SO_ToolBar \l QStyleOptionToolBar | 
|---|
| 127 | \value SO_ToolBox \l QStyleOptionToolBox | 
|---|
| 128 | \value SO_ToolButton \l QStyleOptionToolButton | 
|---|
| 129 | \value SO_ViewItem \l QStyleOptionViewItem (used in Interviews) | 
|---|
| 130 |  | 
|---|
| 131 | The following values are used for custom controls: | 
|---|
| 132 |  | 
|---|
| 133 | \value SO_CustomBase Reserved for custom QStyleOptions; | 
|---|
| 134 | all custom controls values must be above this value | 
|---|
| 135 | \value SO_ComplexCustomBase Reserved for custom QStyleOptions; | 
|---|
| 136 | all custom complex controls values must be above this value | 
|---|
| 137 |  | 
|---|
| 138 | Some style options are defined for various Qt3Support controls: | 
|---|
| 139 |  | 
|---|
| 140 | \value SO_Q3DockWindow \l QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow | 
|---|
| 141 | \value SO_Q3ListView \l QStyleOptionQ3ListView | 
|---|
| 142 | \value SO_Q3ListViewItem \l QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem | 
|---|
| 143 |  | 
|---|
| 144 | \sa type | 
|---|
| 145 | */ | 
|---|
| 146 |  | 
|---|
| 147 | /*! | 
|---|
| 148 | Constructs a QStyleOption with the specified \a version and \a | 
|---|
| 149 | type. | 
|---|
| 150 |  | 
|---|
| 151 | The version has no special meaning for QStyleOption; it can be | 
|---|
| 152 | used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of | 
|---|
| 153 | the same option type. | 
|---|
| 154 |  | 
|---|
| 155 | The \l state member variable is initialized to | 
|---|
| 156 | QStyle::State_None. | 
|---|
| 157 |  | 
|---|
| 158 | \sa version, type | 
|---|
| 159 | */ | 
|---|
| 160 |  | 
|---|
| 161 | QStyleOption::QStyleOption(int version, int type) | 
|---|
| 162 | : version(version), type(type), state(QStyle::State_None), | 
|---|
| 163 | direction(QApplication::layoutDirection()), fontMetrics(QFont()) | 
|---|
| 164 | { | 
|---|
| 165 | } | 
|---|
| 166 |  | 
|---|
| 167 |  | 
|---|
| 168 | /*! | 
|---|
| 169 | Destroys this style option object. | 
|---|
| 170 | */ | 
|---|
| 171 | QStyleOption::~QStyleOption() | 
|---|
| 172 | { | 
|---|
| 173 | } | 
|---|
| 174 |  | 
|---|
| 175 | /*! | 
|---|
| 176 | \fn void QStyleOption::initFrom(const QWidget *widget) | 
|---|
| 177 | \since 4.1 | 
|---|
| 178 |  | 
|---|
| 179 | Initializes the \l state, \l direction, \l rect, \l palette, and | 
|---|
| 180 | \l fontMetrics member variables based on the specified \a widget. | 
|---|
| 181 |  | 
|---|
| 182 | This is a convenience function; the member variables can also be | 
|---|
| 183 | initialized manually. | 
|---|
| 184 |  | 
|---|
| 185 | \sa QWidget::layoutDirection(), QWidget::rect(), | 
|---|
| 186 | QWidget::palette(), QWidget::fontMetrics() | 
|---|
| 187 | */ | 
|---|
| 188 |  | 
|---|
| 189 | /*! | 
|---|
| 190 | \obsolete | 
|---|
| 191 |  | 
|---|
| 192 | Use initFrom(\a widget) instead. | 
|---|
| 193 | */ | 
|---|
| 194 | void QStyleOption::init(const QWidget *widget) | 
|---|
| 195 | { | 
|---|
| 196 | QWidget *window = widget->window(); | 
|---|
| 197 | state = QStyle::State_None; | 
|---|
| 198 | if (widget->isEnabled()) | 
|---|
| 199 | state |= QStyle::State_Enabled; | 
|---|
| 200 | if (widget->hasFocus()) | 
|---|
| 201 | state |= QStyle::State_HasFocus; | 
|---|
| 202 | if (window->testAttribute(Qt::WA_KeyboardFocusChange)) | 
|---|
| 203 | state |= QStyle::State_KeyboardFocusChange; | 
|---|
| 204 | if (widget->underMouse()) | 
|---|
| 205 | state |= QStyle::State_MouseOver; | 
|---|
| 206 | if (window->isActiveWindow()) | 
|---|
| 207 | state |= QStyle::State_Active; | 
|---|
| 208 | if (widget->isWindow()) | 
|---|
| 209 | state |= QStyle::State_Window; | 
|---|
| 210 | #ifdef Q_WS_MAC | 
|---|
| 211 | extern bool qt_mac_can_clickThrough(const QWidget *w); //qwidget_mac.cpp | 
|---|
| 212 | if (!(state & QStyle::State_Active) && !qt_mac_can_clickThrough(widget)) | 
|---|
| 213 | state &= ~QStyle::State_Enabled; | 
|---|
| 214 |  | 
|---|
| 215 | switch (QMacStyle::widgetSizePolicy(widget)) { | 
|---|
| 216 | case QMacStyle::SizeSmall: | 
|---|
| 217 | state |= QStyle::State_Small; | 
|---|
| 218 | break; | 
|---|
| 219 | case QMacStyle::SizeMini: | 
|---|
| 220 | state |= QStyle::State_Mini; | 
|---|
| 221 | break; | 
|---|
| 222 | default: | 
|---|
| 223 | ; | 
|---|
| 224 | } | 
|---|
| 225 | #endif | 
|---|
| 226 | #ifdef QT_KEYPAD_NAVIGATION | 
|---|
| 227 | if (widget->hasEditFocus()) | 
|---|
| 228 | state |= QStyle::State_HasEditFocus; | 
|---|
| 229 | #endif | 
|---|
| 230 |  | 
|---|
| 231 | direction = widget->layoutDirection(); | 
|---|
| 232 | rect = widget->rect(); | 
|---|
| 233 | palette = widget->palette(); | 
|---|
| 234 | fontMetrics = widget->fontMetrics(); | 
|---|
| 235 | } | 
|---|
| 236 |  | 
|---|
| 237 | /*! | 
|---|
| 238 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 239 | */ | 
|---|
| 240 | QStyleOption::QStyleOption(const QStyleOption &other) | 
|---|
| 241 | : version(Version), type(Type), state(other.state), | 
|---|
| 242 | direction(other.direction), rect(other.rect), fontMetrics(other.fontMetrics), | 
|---|
| 243 | palette(other.palette) | 
|---|
| 244 | { | 
|---|
| 245 | } | 
|---|
| 246 |  | 
|---|
| 247 | /*! | 
|---|
| 248 | Assign \a other to this QStyleOption. | 
|---|
| 249 | */ | 
|---|
| 250 | QStyleOption &QStyleOption::operator=(const QStyleOption &other) | 
|---|
| 251 | { | 
|---|
| 252 | state = other.state; | 
|---|
| 253 | direction = other.direction; | 
|---|
| 254 | rect = other.rect; | 
|---|
| 255 | fontMetrics = other.fontMetrics; | 
|---|
| 256 | palette = other.palette; | 
|---|
| 257 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 258 | } | 
|---|
| 259 |  | 
|---|
| 260 | /*! | 
|---|
| 261 | \enum QStyleOption::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 262 |  | 
|---|
| 263 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 264 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 265 |  | 
|---|
| 266 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Default} for | 
|---|
| 267 | this class). | 
|---|
| 268 |  | 
|---|
| 269 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 270 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 271 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 272 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 273 |  | 
|---|
| 274 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 275 | */ | 
|---|
| 276 |  | 
|---|
| 277 | /*! | 
|---|
| 278 | \enum QStyleOption::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 279 |  | 
|---|
| 280 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 281 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 282 |  | 
|---|
| 283 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 284 |  | 
|---|
| 285 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 286 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 287 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 288 |  | 
|---|
| 289 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 290 | */ | 
|---|
| 291 |  | 
|---|
| 292 | /*! | 
|---|
| 293 | \variable QStyleOption::palette | 
|---|
| 294 | \brief the palette that should be used when painting the control | 
|---|
| 295 |  | 
|---|
| 296 | By default, the application's default palette is used. | 
|---|
| 297 |  | 
|---|
| 298 | \sa initFrom() | 
|---|
| 299 | */ | 
|---|
| 300 |  | 
|---|
| 301 | /*! | 
|---|
| 302 | \variable QStyleOption::direction | 
|---|
| 303 | \brief the text layout direction that should be used when drawing text in the control | 
|---|
| 304 |  | 
|---|
| 305 | By default, the layout direction is Qt::LeftToRight. | 
|---|
| 306 |  | 
|---|
| 307 | \sa initFrom() | 
|---|
| 308 | */ | 
|---|
| 309 |  | 
|---|
| 310 | /*! | 
|---|
| 311 | \variable QStyleOption::fontMetrics | 
|---|
| 312 | \brief the font metrics that should be used when drawing text in the control | 
|---|
| 313 |  | 
|---|
| 314 | By default, the application's default font is used. | 
|---|
| 315 |  | 
|---|
| 316 | \sa initFrom() | 
|---|
| 317 | */ | 
|---|
| 318 |  | 
|---|
| 319 | /*! | 
|---|
| 320 | \variable QStyleOption::rect | 
|---|
| 321 | \brief the area that should be used for various calculations and painting | 
|---|
| 322 |  | 
|---|
| 323 | This can have different meanings for different types of elements. | 
|---|
| 324 | For example, for a \l QStyle::CE_PushButton element it would be | 
|---|
| 325 | the rectangle for the entire button, while for a \l | 
|---|
| 326 | QStyle::CE_PushButtonLabel element it would be just the area for | 
|---|
| 327 | the push button label. | 
|---|
| 328 |  | 
|---|
| 329 | The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both | 
|---|
| 330 | the width and the height set to 0. | 
|---|
| 331 |  | 
|---|
| 332 | \sa initFrom() | 
|---|
| 333 | */ | 
|---|
| 334 |  | 
|---|
| 335 | /*! | 
|---|
| 336 | \variable QStyleOption::state | 
|---|
| 337 | \brief the style flags that are used when drawing the control | 
|---|
| 338 |  | 
|---|
| 339 | The default value is QStyle::State_None. | 
|---|
| 340 |  | 
|---|
| 341 | \sa initFrom(), QStyle::drawPrimitive(), QStyle::drawControl(), | 
|---|
| 342 | QStyle::drawComplexControl(), QStyle::State | 
|---|
| 343 | */ | 
|---|
| 344 |  | 
|---|
| 345 | /*! | 
|---|
| 346 | \variable QStyleOption::type | 
|---|
| 347 | \brief the option type of the style option | 
|---|
| 348 |  | 
|---|
| 349 | The default value is SO_Default. | 
|---|
| 350 |  | 
|---|
| 351 | \sa OptionType | 
|---|
| 352 | */ | 
|---|
| 353 |  | 
|---|
| 354 | /*! | 
|---|
| 355 | \variable QStyleOption::version | 
|---|
| 356 | \brief the version of the style option | 
|---|
| 357 |  | 
|---|
| 358 | This value can be used by subclasses to implement extensions | 
|---|
| 359 | without breaking compatibility. If you use the qstyleoption_cast() | 
|---|
| 360 | function, you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 361 |  | 
|---|
| 362 | The default value is 1. | 
|---|
| 363 | */ | 
|---|
| 364 |  | 
|---|
| 365 | /*! | 
|---|
| 366 | \class QStyleOptionFocusRect | 
|---|
| 367 | \brief The QStyleOptionFocusRect class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 368 | parameters for drawing a focus rectangle with QStyle. | 
|---|
| 369 |  | 
|---|
| 370 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 371 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 372 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 373 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 374 |  | 
|---|
| 375 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 376 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 377 |  | 
|---|
| 378 | \sa QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 379 | */ | 
|---|
| 380 |  | 
|---|
| 381 | /*! | 
|---|
| 382 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFocusRect, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 383 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 384 | */ | 
|---|
| 385 |  | 
|---|
| 386 | QStyleOptionFocusRect::QStyleOptionFocusRect() | 
|---|
| 387 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_FocusRect) | 
|---|
| 388 | { | 
|---|
| 389 | state |= QStyle::State_KeyboardFocusChange; // assume we had one, will be corrected in initFrom() | 
|---|
| 390 | } | 
|---|
| 391 |  | 
|---|
| 392 | /*! | 
|---|
| 393 | \internal | 
|---|
| 394 | */ | 
|---|
| 395 | QStyleOptionFocusRect::QStyleOptionFocusRect(int version) | 
|---|
| 396 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_FocusRect) | 
|---|
| 397 | { | 
|---|
| 398 | state |= QStyle::State_KeyboardFocusChange;  // assume we had one, will be corrected in initFrom() | 
|---|
| 399 | } | 
|---|
| 400 |  | 
|---|
| 401 | /*! | 
|---|
| 402 | \enum QStyleOptionFocusRect::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 403 |  | 
|---|
| 404 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 405 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 406 |  | 
|---|
| 407 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_FocusRect} for this class). | 
|---|
| 408 |  | 
|---|
| 409 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 410 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 411 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 412 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 413 |  | 
|---|
| 414 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 415 | */ | 
|---|
| 416 |  | 
|---|
| 417 | /*! | 
|---|
| 418 | \enum QStyleOptionFocusRect::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 419 |  | 
|---|
| 420 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 421 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 422 |  | 
|---|
| 423 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 424 |  | 
|---|
| 425 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 426 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 427 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 428 |  | 
|---|
| 429 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 430 | */ | 
|---|
| 431 |  | 
|---|
| 432 | /*! | 
|---|
| 433 | \fn QStyleOptionFocusRect::QStyleOptionFocusRect(const QStyleOptionFocusRect &other) | 
|---|
| 434 |  | 
|---|
| 435 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 436 | */ | 
|---|
| 437 |  | 
|---|
| 438 | /*! | 
|---|
| 439 | \variable QStyleOptionFocusRect::backgroundColor | 
|---|
| 440 | \brief the background color on which the focus rectangle is being drawn | 
|---|
| 441 |  | 
|---|
| 442 | The default value is an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0, | 
|---|
| 443 | 0). An invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for | 
|---|
| 444 | the underlying window system. | 
|---|
| 445 | */ | 
|---|
| 446 |  | 
|---|
| 447 | /*! | 
|---|
| 448 | \class QStyleOptionFrame | 
|---|
| 449 | \brief The QStyleOptionFrame class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 450 | parameters for drawing a frame. | 
|---|
| 451 |  | 
|---|
| 452 | QStyleOptionFrame is used for drawing several built-in Qt widgets, | 
|---|
| 453 | including QFrame, QGroupBox, QLineEdit, and QMenu. Note that to | 
|---|
| 454 | describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or | 
|---|
| 455 | above, you must use the QStyleOptionFrameV2 subclass. | 
|---|
| 456 |  | 
|---|
| 457 | An instance of the QStyleOptionFrame class has | 
|---|
| 458 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_Frame and \l{QStyleOption::version} | 
|---|
| 459 | {version} 1. | 
|---|
| 460 |  | 
|---|
| 461 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 462 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 463 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 464 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.  The | 
|---|
| 465 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions | 
|---|
| 466 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), | 
|---|
| 467 | you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 468 |  | 
|---|
| 469 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both | 
|---|
| 470 | QStyleOptionFrame and QStyleOptionFrameV2. | 
|---|
| 471 |  | 
|---|
| 472 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 473 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 474 |  | 
|---|
| 475 | \sa QStyleOptionFrameV2, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 476 | */ | 
|---|
| 477 |  | 
|---|
| 478 | /*! | 
|---|
| 479 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrame, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 480 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 481 | */ | 
|---|
| 482 |  | 
|---|
| 483 | QStyleOptionFrame::QStyleOptionFrame() | 
|---|
| 484 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_Frame), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0) | 
|---|
| 485 | { | 
|---|
| 486 | } | 
|---|
| 487 |  | 
|---|
| 488 | /*! | 
|---|
| 489 | \internal | 
|---|
| 490 | */ | 
|---|
| 491 | QStyleOptionFrame::QStyleOptionFrame(int version) | 
|---|
| 492 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Frame), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0) | 
|---|
| 493 | { | 
|---|
| 494 | } | 
|---|
| 495 |  | 
|---|
| 496 | /*! | 
|---|
| 497 | \fn QStyleOptionFrame::QStyleOptionFrame(const QStyleOptionFrame &other) | 
|---|
| 498 |  | 
|---|
| 499 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 500 | */ | 
|---|
| 501 |  | 
|---|
| 502 | /*! | 
|---|
| 503 | \enum QStyleOptionFrame::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 504 |  | 
|---|
| 505 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 506 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 507 |  | 
|---|
| 508 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Frame} for this class). | 
|---|
| 509 |  | 
|---|
| 510 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 511 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 512 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 513 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 514 |  | 
|---|
| 515 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 516 | */ | 
|---|
| 517 |  | 
|---|
| 518 | /*! | 
|---|
| 519 | \enum QStyleOptionFrame::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 520 |  | 
|---|
| 521 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 522 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 523 |  | 
|---|
| 524 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 525 |  | 
|---|
| 526 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 527 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 528 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 529 |  | 
|---|
| 530 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 531 | */ | 
|---|
| 532 |  | 
|---|
| 533 | /*! | 
|---|
| 534 | \variable QStyleOptionFrame::lineWidth | 
|---|
| 535 | \brief the line width for drawing the frame | 
|---|
| 536 |  | 
|---|
| 537 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 538 |  | 
|---|
| 539 | \sa QFrame::lineWidth | 
|---|
| 540 | */ | 
|---|
| 541 |  | 
|---|
| 542 | /*! | 
|---|
| 543 | \variable QStyleOptionFrame::midLineWidth | 
|---|
| 544 | \brief the mid-line width for drawing the frame | 
|---|
| 545 |  | 
|---|
| 546 | This is usually used in drawing sunken or raised frames. | 
|---|
| 547 |  | 
|---|
| 548 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 549 |  | 
|---|
| 550 | \sa QFrame::midLineWidth | 
|---|
| 551 | */ | 
|---|
| 552 |  | 
|---|
| 553 | /*! | 
|---|
| 554 | \class QStyleOptionFrameV2 | 
|---|
| 555 | \brief The QStyleOptionFrameV2 class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 556 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or above. | 
|---|
| 557 |  | 
|---|
| 558 | \since 4.1 | 
|---|
| 559 |  | 
|---|
| 560 | QStyleOptionFrameV2 inherits QStyleOptionFrame which is used for | 
|---|
| 561 | drawing several built-in Qt widgets, including QFrame, QGroupBox, | 
|---|
| 562 | QLineEdit, and QMenu. | 
|---|
| 563 |  | 
|---|
| 564 | An instance of the QStyleOptionFrameV2 class has | 
|---|
| 565 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_Frame and | 
|---|
| 566 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2.  The type is used | 
|---|
| 567 | internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 568 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 569 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 570 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The | 
|---|
| 571 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions | 
|---|
| 572 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), | 
|---|
| 573 | you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 574 |  | 
|---|
| 575 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both | 
|---|
| 576 | QStyleOptionFrame and QStyleOptionFrameV2. One way to achieve this | 
|---|
| 577 | is to use the QStyleOptionFrameV2 copy constructor. For example: | 
|---|
| 578 |  | 
|---|
| 579 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 1 | 
|---|
| 580 |  | 
|---|
| 581 | In the example above: If the \c frameOption's version is 1, \l | 
|---|
| 582 | FrameFeature is set to \l None for \c frameOptionV2. If \c | 
|---|
| 583 | frameOption's version is 2, the constructor will simply copy the | 
|---|
| 584 | \c frameOption's \l FrameFeature value. | 
|---|
| 585 |  | 
|---|
| 586 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 587 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 588 |  | 
|---|
| 589 | \sa QStyleOptionFrame, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 590 | */ | 
|---|
| 591 |  | 
|---|
| 592 | /*! | 
|---|
| 593 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 object. | 
|---|
| 594 | */ | 
|---|
| 595 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::QStyleOptionFrameV2() | 
|---|
| 596 | : QStyleOptionFrame(Version), features(None) | 
|---|
| 597 | { | 
|---|
| 598 | } | 
|---|
| 599 |  | 
|---|
| 600 | /*! | 
|---|
| 601 | \fn QStyleOptionFrameV2::QStyleOptionFrameV2(const QStyleOptionFrameV2 &other) | 
|---|
| 602 |  | 
|---|
| 603 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 604 | */ | 
|---|
| 605 |  | 
|---|
| 606 | /*! | 
|---|
| 607 | \internal | 
|---|
| 608 | */ | 
|---|
| 609 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::QStyleOptionFrameV2(int version) | 
|---|
| 610 | : QStyleOptionFrame(version), features(None) | 
|---|
| 611 | { | 
|---|
| 612 | } | 
|---|
| 613 |  | 
|---|
| 614 | /*! | 
|---|
| 615 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 copy of the \a other style option | 
|---|
| 616 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV2 or | 
|---|
| 617 | QStyleOptionFrame types. | 
|---|
| 618 |  | 
|---|
| 619 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style option's \l | 
|---|
| 620 | FrameFeature value is set to \l QStyleOptionFrameV2::None. If its | 
|---|
| 621 | version is 2, its \l FrameFeature value is simply copied to the | 
|---|
| 622 | new style option. | 
|---|
| 623 |  | 
|---|
| 624 | \sa version | 
|---|
| 625 | */ | 
|---|
| 626 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::QStyleOptionFrameV2(const QStyleOptionFrame &other) | 
|---|
| 627 | { | 
|---|
| 628 | QStyleOptionFrame::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 629 |  | 
|---|
| 630 | const QStyleOptionFrameV2 *f2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionFrameV2 *>(&other); | 
|---|
| 631 | features = f2 ? f2->features : FrameFeatures(QStyleOptionFrameV2::None); | 
|---|
| 632 | version = Version; | 
|---|
| 633 | } | 
|---|
| 634 |  | 
|---|
| 635 | /*! | 
|---|
| 636 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a | 
|---|
| 637 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV2 or | 
|---|
| 638 | QStyleOptionFrame types. | 
|---|
| 639 |  | 
|---|
| 640 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, this style option's | 
|---|
| 641 | \l FrameFeature value is set to \l QStyleOptionFrameV2::None. If | 
|---|
| 642 | its version is 2, its \l FrameFeature value is simply copied to | 
|---|
| 643 | this style option. | 
|---|
| 644 | */ | 
|---|
| 645 | QStyleOptionFrameV2 &QStyleOptionFrameV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionFrame &other) | 
|---|
| 646 | { | 
|---|
| 647 | QStyleOptionFrame::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 648 |  | 
|---|
| 649 | const QStyleOptionFrameV2 *f2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionFrameV2 *>(&other); | 
|---|
| 650 | features = f2 ? f2->features : FrameFeatures(QStyleOptionFrameV2::None); | 
|---|
| 651 | version = Version; | 
|---|
| 652 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 653 | } | 
|---|
| 654 |  | 
|---|
| 655 | /*! | 
|---|
| 656 | \enum QStyleOptionFrameV2::FrameFeature | 
|---|
| 657 |  | 
|---|
| 658 | This enum describes the different types of features a frame can have. | 
|---|
| 659 |  | 
|---|
| 660 | \value None Indicates a normal frame. | 
|---|
| 661 | \value Flat Indicates a flat frame. | 
|---|
| 662 | */ | 
|---|
| 663 |  | 
|---|
| 664 | /*! | 
|---|
| 665 | \variable QStyleOptionFrameV2::features | 
|---|
| 666 | \brief a bitwise OR of the features that describe this frame. | 
|---|
| 667 |  | 
|---|
| 668 | \sa FrameFeature | 
|---|
| 669 | */ | 
|---|
| 670 |  | 
|---|
| 671 | /*! | 
|---|
| 672 | \enum QStyleOptionFrameV2::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 673 |  | 
|---|
| 674 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the | 
|---|
| 675 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 676 |  | 
|---|
| 677 | \value Version 2 | 
|---|
| 678 |  | 
|---|
| 679 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 680 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 681 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 682 |  | 
|---|
| 683 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 684 | */ | 
|---|
| 685 |  | 
|---|
| 686 | /*! | 
|---|
| 687 | \class QStyleOptionFrameV3 | 
|---|
| 688 | \brief The QStyleOptionFrameV3 class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 689 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or above. | 
|---|
| 690 |  | 
|---|
| 691 | \since 4.5 | 
|---|
| 692 |  | 
|---|
| 693 | QStyleOptionFrameV3 inherits QStyleOptionFrameV2 | 
|---|
| 694 |  | 
|---|
| 695 | An instance of the QStyleOptionFrameV3 class has | 
|---|
| 696 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_Frame and | 
|---|
| 697 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 3.  The type is used | 
|---|
| 698 | internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 699 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 700 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 701 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The | 
|---|
| 702 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions | 
|---|
| 703 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), | 
|---|
| 704 | you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 705 |  | 
|---|
| 706 | \sa QStyleOptionFrameV2, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 707 | */ | 
|---|
| 708 |  | 
|---|
| 709 | /*! | 
|---|
| 710 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 object. | 
|---|
| 711 | */ | 
|---|
| 712 | QStyleOptionFrameV3::QStyleOptionFrameV3() | 
|---|
| 713 | : QStyleOptionFrameV2(Version), frameShape(QFrame::NoFrame), unused(0) | 
|---|
| 714 | { | 
|---|
| 715 | } | 
|---|
| 716 |  | 
|---|
| 717 | /*! | 
|---|
| 718 | \fn QStyleOptionFrameV3::QStyleOptionFrameV3(const QStyleOptionFrameV3 &other) | 
|---|
| 719 |  | 
|---|
| 720 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 721 | */ | 
|---|
| 722 |  | 
|---|
| 723 | /*! | 
|---|
| 724 | \internal | 
|---|
| 725 | */ | 
|---|
| 726 | QStyleOptionFrameV3::QStyleOptionFrameV3(int version) | 
|---|
| 727 | : QStyleOptionFrameV2(version), frameShape(QFrame::NoFrame), unused(0) | 
|---|
| 728 | { | 
|---|
| 729 | } | 
|---|
| 730 |  | 
|---|
| 731 | /*! | 
|---|
| 732 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 copy of the \a other style option | 
|---|
| 733 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV3 or | 
|---|
| 734 | QStyleOptionFrame types. | 
|---|
| 735 |  | 
|---|
| 736 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style | 
|---|
| 737 | option's \l FrameFeature value is set to | 
|---|
| 738 | \l{QStyleOptionFrameV2::None}. If its version is 2 or lower, | 
|---|
| 739 | \l{QStyleOptionFrameV3::frameShape} value is QFrame::NoFrame | 
|---|
| 740 |  | 
|---|
| 741 | \sa version | 
|---|
| 742 | */ | 
|---|
| 743 | QStyleOptionFrameV3::QStyleOptionFrameV3(const QStyleOptionFrame &other) | 
|---|
| 744 | { | 
|---|
| 745 | operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 746 | } | 
|---|
| 747 |  | 
|---|
| 748 | /*! | 
|---|
| 749 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a | 
|---|
| 750 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV3, | 
|---|
| 751 | QStyleOptionFrameV2 or QStyleOptionFrame types. | 
|---|
| 752 |  | 
|---|
| 753 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style | 
|---|
| 754 | option's \l FrameFeature value is set to | 
|---|
| 755 | \l{QStyleOptionFrameV2::None}. If its version is 2 or lower, | 
|---|
| 756 | \l{QStyleOptionFrameV3::frameShape} value is QFrame::NoFrame | 
|---|
| 757 | */ | 
|---|
| 758 | QStyleOptionFrameV3 &QStyleOptionFrameV3::operator=(const QStyleOptionFrame &other) | 
|---|
| 759 | { | 
|---|
| 760 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 761 |  | 
|---|
| 762 | const QStyleOptionFrameV3 *f3 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionFrameV3 *>(&other); | 
|---|
| 763 | frameShape = f3 ? f3->frameShape : QFrame::NoFrame; | 
|---|
| 764 | version = Version; | 
|---|
| 765 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 766 | } | 
|---|
| 767 |  | 
|---|
| 768 |  | 
|---|
| 769 | /*! | 
|---|
| 770 | \variable QStyleOptionFrameV3::frameShape | 
|---|
| 771 | \brief This property holds the frame shape value of the frame. | 
|---|
| 772 |  | 
|---|
| 773 | \sa QFrame::frameShape | 
|---|
| 774 | */ | 
|---|
| 775 |  | 
|---|
| 776 | /*! | 
|---|
| 777 | \enum QStyleOptionFrameV3::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 778 |  | 
|---|
| 779 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 780 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 781 |  | 
|---|
| 782 | \value Version 3 | 
|---|
| 783 |  | 
|---|
| 784 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 785 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 786 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 787 |  | 
|---|
| 788 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 789 | */ | 
|---|
| 790 |  | 
|---|
| 791 | /*! | 
|---|
| 792 | \class QStyleOptionViewItemV2 | 
|---|
| 793 | \brief The QStyleOptionViewItemV2 class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 794 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.2 or above. | 
|---|
| 795 | \since 4.2 | 
|---|
| 796 |  | 
|---|
| 797 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2 inherits QStyleOptionViewItem. | 
|---|
| 798 |  | 
|---|
| 799 | An instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2 class has | 
|---|
| 800 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_ViewItem and | 
|---|
| 801 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2. The type is used internally | 
|---|
| 802 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to | 
|---|
| 803 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to | 
|---|
| 804 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 805 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 806 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking | 
|---|
| 807 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not | 
|---|
| 808 | need to check it. | 
|---|
| 809 |  | 
|---|
| 810 | See QStyleOptionFrameV2's detailed description for a discussion | 
|---|
| 811 | of how to handle "V2" classes. | 
|---|
| 812 |  | 
|---|
| 813 | \sa QStyleOptionViewItem, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 814 | */ | 
|---|
| 815 |  | 
|---|
| 816 | /*! | 
|---|
| 817 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV2::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 818 |  | 
|---|
| 819 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the | 
|---|
| 820 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 821 |  | 
|---|
| 822 | \value Version 2 | 
|---|
| 823 |  | 
|---|
| 824 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 825 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 826 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 827 |  | 
|---|
| 828 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 829 | */ | 
|---|
| 830 |  | 
|---|
| 831 | /*! | 
|---|
| 832 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV2::features | 
|---|
| 833 | \brief a bitwise OR of the features that describe this view item | 
|---|
| 834 |  | 
|---|
| 835 | \sa ViewItemFeature | 
|---|
| 836 | */ | 
|---|
| 837 |  | 
|---|
| 838 | /*! | 
|---|
| 839 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV2 object. | 
|---|
| 840 | */ | 
|---|
| 841 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2::QStyleOptionViewItemV2() | 
|---|
| 842 | : QStyleOptionViewItem(Version), features(None) | 
|---|
| 843 | { | 
|---|
| 844 | } | 
|---|
| 845 |  | 
|---|
| 846 | /*! | 
|---|
| 847 | \fn QStyleOptionViewItemV2::QStyleOptionViewItemV2(const QStyleOptionViewItemV2 &other) | 
|---|
| 848 |  | 
|---|
| 849 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 850 | */ | 
|---|
| 851 |  | 
|---|
| 852 | /*! | 
|---|
| 853 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV2 copy of the \a other style option | 
|---|
| 854 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2 or | 
|---|
| 855 | QStyleOptionViewItem types. | 
|---|
| 856 |  | 
|---|
| 857 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style option's \l | 
|---|
| 858 | ViewItemFeature value is set to \l QStyleOptionViewItemV2::None. If its | 
|---|
| 859 | version is 2, its \l ViewItemFeature value is simply copied to the | 
|---|
| 860 | new style option. | 
|---|
| 861 |  | 
|---|
| 862 | \sa version | 
|---|
| 863 | */ | 
|---|
| 864 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2::QStyleOptionViewItemV2(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other) | 
|---|
| 865 | : QStyleOptionViewItem(Version) | 
|---|
| 866 | { | 
|---|
| 867 | (void)QStyleOptionViewItemV2::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 868 | } | 
|---|
| 869 |  | 
|---|
| 870 | /*! | 
|---|
| 871 | \internal | 
|---|
| 872 | */ | 
|---|
| 873 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2::QStyleOptionViewItemV2(int version) | 
|---|
| 874 | : QStyleOptionViewItem(version) | 
|---|
| 875 | { | 
|---|
| 876 |  | 
|---|
| 877 | } | 
|---|
| 878 |  | 
|---|
| 879 | /*! | 
|---|
| 880 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a | 
|---|
| 881 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2 or | 
|---|
| 882 | QStyleOptionViewItem types. | 
|---|
| 883 |  | 
|---|
| 884 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, this style option's | 
|---|
| 885 | \l ViewItemFeature value is set to \l QStyleOptionViewItemV2::None. | 
|---|
| 886 | If its version is 2, its \l ViewItemFeature value is simply copied | 
|---|
| 887 | to this style option. | 
|---|
| 888 | */ | 
|---|
| 889 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2 &QStyleOptionViewItemV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other) | 
|---|
| 890 | { | 
|---|
| 891 | QStyleOptionViewItem::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 892 | const QStyleOptionViewItemV2 *v2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionViewItemV2 *>(&other); | 
|---|
| 893 | features = v2 ? v2->features : ViewItemFeatures(QStyleOptionViewItemV2::None); | 
|---|
| 894 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 895 | } | 
|---|
| 896 |  | 
|---|
| 897 | /*! | 
|---|
| 898 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV2::ViewItemFeature | 
|---|
| 899 |  | 
|---|
| 900 | This enum describes the different types of features an item can have. | 
|---|
| 901 |  | 
|---|
| 902 | \value None      Indicates a normal item. | 
|---|
| 903 | \value WrapText  Indicates an item with wrapped text. | 
|---|
| 904 | \value Alternate Indicates that the item's background is rendered using alternateBase. | 
|---|
| 905 | \value HasCheckIndicator Indicates that the item has a check state indicator. | 
|---|
| 906 | \value HasDisplay        Indicates that the item has a display role. | 
|---|
| 907 | \value HasDecoration     Indicates that the item has a decoration role. | 
|---|
| 908 | */ | 
|---|
| 909 |  | 
|---|
| 910 |  | 
|---|
| 911 |  | 
|---|
| 912 | /*! | 
|---|
| 913 | \class QStyleOptionViewItemV3 | 
|---|
| 914 | \brief The QStyleOptionViewItemV3 class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 915 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.3 or above. | 
|---|
| 916 | \since 4.3 | 
|---|
| 917 |  | 
|---|
| 918 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3 inherits QStyleOptionViewItem. | 
|---|
| 919 |  | 
|---|
| 920 | An instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV3 class has | 
|---|
| 921 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_ViewItem and \l{QStyleOption::version} | 
|---|
| 922 | {version} 3. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, | 
|---|
| 923 | and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general | 
|---|
| 924 | you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own | 
|---|
| 925 | QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by | 
|---|
| 926 | QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking | 
|---|
| 927 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to | 
|---|
| 928 | check it. | 
|---|
| 929 |  | 
|---|
| 930 | See QStyleOptionFrameV2's detailed description for a discussion | 
|---|
| 931 | of how to handle "V2" and other versioned classes. | 
|---|
| 932 |  | 
|---|
| 933 | \sa QStyleOptionViewItem, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 934 | */ | 
|---|
| 935 |  | 
|---|
| 936 | /*! | 
|---|
| 937 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV3::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 938 |  | 
|---|
| 939 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the | 
|---|
| 940 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 941 |  | 
|---|
| 942 | \value Version 3 | 
|---|
| 943 |  | 
|---|
| 944 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 945 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 946 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 947 |  | 
|---|
| 948 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 949 | */ | 
|---|
| 950 |  | 
|---|
| 951 | /*! | 
|---|
| 952 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV3 object. | 
|---|
| 953 | */ | 
|---|
| 954 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3::QStyleOptionViewItemV3() | 
|---|
| 955 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV2(Version), widget(0) | 
|---|
| 956 | { | 
|---|
| 957 | } | 
|---|
| 958 |  | 
|---|
| 959 | /*! | 
|---|
| 960 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 961 | */ | 
|---|
| 962 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3::QStyleOptionViewItemV3(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other) | 
|---|
| 963 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV2(Version), widget(0) | 
|---|
| 964 | { | 
|---|
| 965 | (void)QStyleOptionViewItemV3::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 966 | } | 
|---|
| 967 |  | 
|---|
| 968 | /*! | 
|---|
| 969 | \fn QStyleOptionViewItemV3::QStyleOptionViewItemV3(const QStyleOptionViewItemV3 &other) | 
|---|
| 970 |  | 
|---|
| 971 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 972 | */ | 
|---|
| 973 |  | 
|---|
| 974 | /*! | 
|---|
| 975 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a | 
|---|
| 976 | other style option can be an instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2, | 
|---|
| 977 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3 or QStyleOptionViewItem types. | 
|---|
| 978 | */ | 
|---|
| 979 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3 &QStyleOptionViewItemV3::operator = (const QStyleOptionViewItem &other) | 
|---|
| 980 | { | 
|---|
| 981 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 982 | const QStyleOptionViewItemV3 *v3 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionViewItemV3*>(&other); | 
|---|
| 983 | locale = v3 ? v3->locale : QLocale(); | 
|---|
| 984 | widget = v3 ? v3->widget : 0; | 
|---|
| 985 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 986 | } | 
|---|
| 987 |  | 
|---|
| 988 | /*! | 
|---|
| 989 | \internal | 
|---|
| 990 | */ | 
|---|
| 991 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3::QStyleOptionViewItemV3(int version) | 
|---|
| 992 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV2(version), widget(0) | 
|---|
| 993 | { | 
|---|
| 994 | } | 
|---|
| 995 |  | 
|---|
| 996 | #ifndef QT_NO_ITEMVIEWS | 
|---|
| 997 |  | 
|---|
| 998 | /*! | 
|---|
| 999 | \class QStyleOptionViewItemV4 | 
|---|
| 1000 | \brief The QStyleOptionViewItemV4 class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 1001 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.4 or above. | 
|---|
| 1002 | \since 4.4 | 
|---|
| 1003 |  | 
|---|
| 1004 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4 inherits QStyleOptionViewItemV3. | 
|---|
| 1005 |  | 
|---|
| 1006 | An instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV4 class has | 
|---|
| 1007 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_ViewItem and | 
|---|
| 1008 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 4. The type is used internally | 
|---|
| 1009 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to | 
|---|
| 1010 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to | 
|---|
| 1011 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1012 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1013 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking | 
|---|
| 1014 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not | 
|---|
| 1015 | need to check it. | 
|---|
| 1016 |  | 
|---|
| 1017 | See QStyleOptionViewItemV3's detailed description for a discussion | 
|---|
| 1018 | of how to handle "V3" classes. | 
|---|
| 1019 |  | 
|---|
| 1020 | \sa QStyleOptionViewItem, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1021 | */ | 
|---|
| 1022 |  | 
|---|
| 1023 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1024 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::index | 
|---|
| 1025 |  | 
|---|
| 1026 | The model index that is to be drawn. | 
|---|
| 1027 | */ | 
|---|
| 1028 |  | 
|---|
| 1029 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1030 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::checkState | 
|---|
| 1031 |  | 
|---|
| 1032 | If this view item is checkable, i.e., | 
|---|
| 1033 | ViewItemFeature::HasCheckIndicator is true, \c checkState is true | 
|---|
| 1034 | if the item is checked; otherwise, it is false. | 
|---|
| 1035 |  | 
|---|
| 1036 | */ | 
|---|
| 1037 |  | 
|---|
| 1038 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1039 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::icon | 
|---|
| 1040 |  | 
|---|
| 1041 | The icon (if any) to be drawn in the view item. | 
|---|
| 1042 | */ | 
|---|
| 1043 |  | 
|---|
| 1044 |  | 
|---|
| 1045 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1046 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::text | 
|---|
| 1047 |  | 
|---|
| 1048 | The text (if any) to be drawn in the view item. | 
|---|
| 1049 | */ | 
|---|
| 1050 |  | 
|---|
| 1051 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1052 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::backgroundBrush | 
|---|
| 1053 |  | 
|---|
| 1054 | The QBrush that should be used to paint the view items | 
|---|
| 1055 | background. | 
|---|
| 1056 | */ | 
|---|
| 1057 |  | 
|---|
| 1058 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1059 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::viewItemPosition | 
|---|
| 1060 |  | 
|---|
| 1061 | Gives the position of this view item relative to other items. See | 
|---|
| 1062 | the \l{QStyleOptionViewItemV4::}{ViewItemPosition} enum for the | 
|---|
| 1063 | details. | 
|---|
| 1064 | */ | 
|---|
| 1065 |  | 
|---|
| 1066 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1067 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV4::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1068 |  | 
|---|
| 1069 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the | 
|---|
| 1070 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1071 |  | 
|---|
| 1072 | \value Version 4 | 
|---|
| 1073 |  | 
|---|
| 1074 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 1075 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 1076 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 1077 |  | 
|---|
| 1078 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1079 | */ | 
|---|
| 1080 |  | 
|---|
| 1081 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1082 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV4::ViewItemPosition | 
|---|
| 1083 |  | 
|---|
| 1084 | This enum is used to represent the placement of the item on | 
|---|
| 1085 | a row. This can be used to draw items differently depending | 
|---|
| 1086 | on their placement, for example by putting rounded edges at | 
|---|
| 1087 | the beginning and end, and straight edges in between. | 
|---|
| 1088 |  | 
|---|
| 1089 | \value Invalid   The ViewItemPosition is unknown and should be | 
|---|
| 1090 | disregarded. | 
|---|
| 1091 | \value Beginning The item appears at the beginning of the row. | 
|---|
| 1092 | \value Middle    The item appears in the middle of the row. | 
|---|
| 1093 | \value End       The item appears at the end of the row. | 
|---|
| 1094 | \value OnlyOne   The item is the only one on the row, and is | 
|---|
| 1095 | therefore both at the beginning and the end. | 
|---|
| 1096 | */ | 
|---|
| 1097 |  | 
|---|
| 1098 |  | 
|---|
| 1099 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1100 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV4 object. | 
|---|
| 1101 | */ | 
|---|
| 1102 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4::QStyleOptionViewItemV4() | 
|---|
| 1103 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV3(Version), checkState(Qt::Unchecked), viewItemPosition(QStyleOptionViewItemV4::Invalid) | 
|---|
| 1104 | { | 
|---|
| 1105 | } | 
|---|
| 1106 |  | 
|---|
| 1107 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1108 | \fn QStyleOptionViewItemV4::QStyleOptionViewItemV4(const QStyleOptionViewItemV4 &other) | 
|---|
| 1109 |  | 
|---|
| 1110 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 1111 | */ | 
|---|
| 1112 |  | 
|---|
| 1113 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1114 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV4 copy of the \a other style option | 
|---|
| 1115 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV3 or | 
|---|
| 1116 | QStyleOptionViewItem types. | 
|---|
| 1117 |  | 
|---|
| 1118 | \sa version | 
|---|
| 1119 | */ | 
|---|
| 1120 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4::QStyleOptionViewItemV4(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other) | 
|---|
| 1121 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV3(Version) | 
|---|
| 1122 | { | 
|---|
| 1123 | (void)QStyleOptionViewItemV4::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 1124 | } | 
|---|
| 1125 |  | 
|---|
| 1126 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1127 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a | 
|---|
| 1128 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV3 or | 
|---|
| 1129 | QStyleOptionViewItem types. | 
|---|
| 1130 | */ | 
|---|
| 1131 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4 &QStyleOptionViewItemV4::operator = (const QStyleOptionViewItem &other) | 
|---|
| 1132 | { | 
|---|
| 1133 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 1134 | if (const QStyleOptionViewItemV4 *v4 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionViewItemV4*>(&other)) { | 
|---|
| 1135 | index = v4->index; | 
|---|
| 1136 | checkState = v4->checkState; | 
|---|
| 1137 | text = v4->text; | 
|---|
| 1138 | viewItemPosition = v4->viewItemPosition; | 
|---|
| 1139 | backgroundBrush = v4->backgroundBrush; | 
|---|
| 1140 | icon = v4->icon; | 
|---|
| 1141 | } else { | 
|---|
| 1142 | viewItemPosition = QStyleOptionViewItemV4::Invalid; | 
|---|
| 1143 | checkState = Qt::Unchecked; | 
|---|
| 1144 | } | 
|---|
| 1145 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 1146 | } | 
|---|
| 1147 |  | 
|---|
| 1148 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1149 | \internal | 
|---|
| 1150 | */ | 
|---|
| 1151 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4::QStyleOptionViewItemV4(int version) | 
|---|
| 1152 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV3(version) | 
|---|
| 1153 | { | 
|---|
| 1154 | } | 
|---|
| 1155 | #endif // QT_NO_ITEMVIEWS | 
|---|
| 1156 |  | 
|---|
| 1157 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1158 | \class QStyleOptionGroupBox | 
|---|
| 1159 | \brief The QStyleOptionGroupBox class describes the parameters for | 
|---|
| 1160 | drawing a group box. | 
|---|
| 1161 |  | 
|---|
| 1162 | \since 4.1 | 
|---|
| 1163 |  | 
|---|
| 1164 | QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 1165 | functions need the various graphical elements of a group box. | 
|---|
| 1166 |  | 
|---|
| 1167 | It holds the lineWidth and the midLineWidth for drawing the panel, | 
|---|
| 1168 | the group box's \l {text}{title} and the title's \l | 
|---|
| 1169 | {textAlignment}{alignment} and \l {textColor}{color}. | 
|---|
| 1170 |  | 
|---|
| 1171 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 1172 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 1173 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 1174 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 1175 |  | 
|---|
| 1176 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 1177 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 1178 |  | 
|---|
| 1179 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QGroupBox | 
|---|
| 1180 | */ | 
|---|
| 1181 |  | 
|---|
| 1182 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1183 | \enum QStyleOptionGroupBox::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1184 |  | 
|---|
| 1185 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 1186 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1187 |  | 
|---|
| 1188 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_GroupBox} for this class). | 
|---|
| 1189 |  | 
|---|
| 1190 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 1191 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 1192 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 1193 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 1194 |  | 
|---|
| 1195 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1196 | */ | 
|---|
| 1197 |  | 
|---|
| 1198 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1199 | \enum QStyleOptionGroupBox::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1200 |  | 
|---|
| 1201 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 1202 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1203 |  | 
|---|
| 1204 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 1205 |  | 
|---|
| 1206 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 1207 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 1208 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 1209 |  | 
|---|
| 1210 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1211 | */ | 
|---|
| 1212 |  | 
|---|
| 1213 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1214 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::lineWidth | 
|---|
| 1215 | \brief the line width for drawing the panel | 
|---|
| 1216 |  | 
|---|
| 1217 | The value of this variable is, currently, always 1. | 
|---|
| 1218 |  | 
|---|
| 1219 | \sa QFrame::lineWidth | 
|---|
| 1220 | */ | 
|---|
| 1221 |  | 
|---|
| 1222 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1223 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::midLineWidth | 
|---|
| 1224 | \brief the mid-line width for drawing the panel | 
|---|
| 1225 |  | 
|---|
| 1226 | The mid-line width is usually used when drawing sunken or raised | 
|---|
| 1227 | group box frames. The value of this variable is, currently, always 0. | 
|---|
| 1228 |  | 
|---|
| 1229 | \sa QFrame::midLineWidth | 
|---|
| 1230 | */ | 
|---|
| 1231 |  | 
|---|
| 1232 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1233 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::text | 
|---|
| 1234 | \brief the text of the group box | 
|---|
| 1235 |  | 
|---|
| 1236 | The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 1237 |  | 
|---|
| 1238 | \sa QGroupBox::title | 
|---|
| 1239 | */ | 
|---|
| 1240 |  | 
|---|
| 1241 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1242 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::textAlignment | 
|---|
| 1243 | \brief the alignment of the group box title | 
|---|
| 1244 |  | 
|---|
| 1245 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft. | 
|---|
| 1246 |  | 
|---|
| 1247 | \sa QGroupBox::alignment | 
|---|
| 1248 | */ | 
|---|
| 1249 |  | 
|---|
| 1250 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1251 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::features | 
|---|
| 1252 | \brief the features of the group box frame | 
|---|
| 1253 |  | 
|---|
| 1254 | The frame is flat by default. | 
|---|
| 1255 |  | 
|---|
| 1256 | \sa QStyleOptionFrameV2::FrameFeature | 
|---|
| 1257 | */ | 
|---|
| 1258 |  | 
|---|
| 1259 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1260 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::textColor | 
|---|
| 1261 | \brief the color of the group box title | 
|---|
| 1262 |  | 
|---|
| 1263 | The default value is an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0, | 
|---|
| 1264 | 0). An invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for | 
|---|
| 1265 | the underlying window system. | 
|---|
| 1266 | */ | 
|---|
| 1267 |  | 
|---|
| 1268 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1269 | Constructs a QStyleOptionGroupBox, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 1270 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 1271 | */ | 
|---|
| 1272 | QStyleOptionGroupBox::QStyleOptionGroupBox() | 
|---|
| 1273 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, Type), features(QStyleOptionFrameV2::None), | 
|---|
| 1274 | textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0) | 
|---|
| 1275 | { | 
|---|
| 1276 | } | 
|---|
| 1277 |  | 
|---|
| 1278 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1279 | \fn QStyleOptionGroupBox::QStyleOptionGroupBox(const QStyleOptionGroupBox &other) | 
|---|
| 1280 |  | 
|---|
| 1281 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 1282 | */ | 
|---|
| 1283 |  | 
|---|
| 1284 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1285 | \internal | 
|---|
| 1286 | */ | 
|---|
| 1287 | QStyleOptionGroupBox::QStyleOptionGroupBox(int version) | 
|---|
| 1288 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, Type), features(QStyleOptionFrameV2::None), | 
|---|
| 1289 | textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0) | 
|---|
| 1290 | { | 
|---|
| 1291 | } | 
|---|
| 1292 |  | 
|---|
| 1293 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1294 | \class QStyleOptionHeader | 
|---|
| 1295 | \brief The QStyleOptionHeader class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 1296 | parameters for drawing a header. | 
|---|
| 1297 |  | 
|---|
| 1298 | QStyleOptionHeader contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 1299 | functions need to draw the item views' header pane, header sort | 
|---|
| 1300 | arrow, and header label. | 
|---|
| 1301 |  | 
|---|
| 1302 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 1303 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 1304 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 1305 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 1306 |  | 
|---|
| 1307 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 1308 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 1309 |  | 
|---|
| 1310 | \sa QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1311 | */ | 
|---|
| 1312 |  | 
|---|
| 1313 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1314 | Constructs a QStyleOptionHeader, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 1315 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 1316 | */ | 
|---|
| 1317 |  | 
|---|
| 1318 | QStyleOptionHeader::QStyleOptionHeader() | 
|---|
| 1319 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionHeader::Version, SO_Header), | 
|---|
| 1320 | section(0), textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), iconAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), | 
|---|
| 1321 | position(QStyleOptionHeader::Beginning), | 
|---|
| 1322 | selectedPosition(QStyleOptionHeader::NotAdjacent), sortIndicator(None), | 
|---|
| 1323 | orientation(Qt::Horizontal) | 
|---|
| 1324 | { | 
|---|
| 1325 | } | 
|---|
| 1326 |  | 
|---|
| 1327 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1328 | \internal | 
|---|
| 1329 | */ | 
|---|
| 1330 | QStyleOptionHeader::QStyleOptionHeader(int version) | 
|---|
| 1331 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Header), | 
|---|
| 1332 | section(0), textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), iconAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), | 
|---|
| 1333 | position(QStyleOptionHeader::Beginning), | 
|---|
| 1334 | selectedPosition(QStyleOptionHeader::NotAdjacent), sortIndicator(None), | 
|---|
| 1335 | orientation(Qt::Horizontal) | 
|---|
| 1336 | { | 
|---|
| 1337 | } | 
|---|
| 1338 |  | 
|---|
| 1339 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1340 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::orientation | 
|---|
| 1341 | \brief the header's orientation (horizontal or vertical) | 
|---|
| 1342 |  | 
|---|
| 1343 | The default orientation is Qt::Horizontal | 
|---|
| 1344 | */ | 
|---|
| 1345 |  | 
|---|
| 1346 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1347 | \fn QStyleOptionHeader::QStyleOptionHeader(const QStyleOptionHeader &other) | 
|---|
| 1348 |  | 
|---|
| 1349 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 1350 | */ | 
|---|
| 1351 |  | 
|---|
| 1352 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1353 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1354 |  | 
|---|
| 1355 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 1356 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1357 |  | 
|---|
| 1358 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Header} for this class). | 
|---|
| 1359 |  | 
|---|
| 1360 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 1361 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 1362 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 1363 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 1364 |  | 
|---|
| 1365 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1366 | */ | 
|---|
| 1367 |  | 
|---|
| 1368 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1369 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1370 |  | 
|---|
| 1371 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 1372 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1373 |  | 
|---|
| 1374 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 1375 |  | 
|---|
| 1376 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 1377 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 1378 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 1379 |  | 
|---|
| 1380 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1381 | */ | 
|---|
| 1382 |  | 
|---|
| 1383 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1384 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::section | 
|---|
| 1385 | \brief which section of the header is being painted | 
|---|
| 1386 |  | 
|---|
| 1387 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 1388 | */ | 
|---|
| 1389 |  | 
|---|
| 1390 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1391 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::text | 
|---|
| 1392 | \brief the text of the header | 
|---|
| 1393 |  | 
|---|
| 1394 | The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 1395 | */ | 
|---|
| 1396 |  | 
|---|
| 1397 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1398 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::textAlignment | 
|---|
| 1399 | \brief the alignment flags for the text of the header | 
|---|
| 1400 |  | 
|---|
| 1401 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft. | 
|---|
| 1402 | */ | 
|---|
| 1403 |  | 
|---|
| 1404 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1405 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::icon | 
|---|
| 1406 | \brief the icon of the header | 
|---|
| 1407 |  | 
|---|
| 1408 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a | 
|---|
| 1409 | pixmap nor a filename. | 
|---|
| 1410 | */ | 
|---|
| 1411 |  | 
|---|
| 1412 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1413 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::iconAlignment | 
|---|
| 1414 | \brief the alignment flags for the icon of the header | 
|---|
| 1415 |  | 
|---|
| 1416 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft. | 
|---|
| 1417 | */ | 
|---|
| 1418 |  | 
|---|
| 1419 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1420 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::position | 
|---|
| 1421 | \brief the section's position in relation to the other sections | 
|---|
| 1422 |  | 
|---|
| 1423 | The default value is QStyleOptionHeader::Beginning. | 
|---|
| 1424 | */ | 
|---|
| 1425 |  | 
|---|
| 1426 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1427 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::selectedPosition | 
|---|
| 1428 | \brief the section's position in relation to the selected section | 
|---|
| 1429 |  | 
|---|
| 1430 | The default value is QStyleOptionHeader::NotAdjacent | 
|---|
| 1431 | */ | 
|---|
| 1432 |  | 
|---|
| 1433 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1434 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::sortIndicator | 
|---|
| 1435 | \brief the direction the sort indicator should be drawn | 
|---|
| 1436 |  | 
|---|
| 1437 | The default value is QStyleOptionHeader::None. | 
|---|
| 1438 | */ | 
|---|
| 1439 |  | 
|---|
| 1440 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1441 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::SectionPosition | 
|---|
| 1442 |  | 
|---|
| 1443 | This enum lets you know where the section's position is in relation to the other sections. | 
|---|
| 1444 |  | 
|---|
| 1445 | \value Beginning At the beginining of the header | 
|---|
| 1446 | \value Middle In the middle of the header | 
|---|
| 1447 | \value End At the end of the header | 
|---|
| 1448 | \value OnlyOneSection Only one header section | 
|---|
| 1449 |  | 
|---|
| 1450 | \sa position | 
|---|
| 1451 | */ | 
|---|
| 1452 |  | 
|---|
| 1453 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1454 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::SelectedPosition | 
|---|
| 1455 |  | 
|---|
| 1456 | This enum lets you know where the section's position is in relation to the selected section. | 
|---|
| 1457 |  | 
|---|
| 1458 | \value NotAdjacent Not adjacent to the selected section | 
|---|
| 1459 | \value NextIsSelected The next section is selected | 
|---|
| 1460 | \value PreviousIsSelected The previous section is selected | 
|---|
| 1461 | \value NextAndPreviousAreSelected Both the next and previous section are selected | 
|---|
| 1462 |  | 
|---|
| 1463 | \sa selectedPosition | 
|---|
| 1464 | */ | 
|---|
| 1465 |  | 
|---|
| 1466 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1467 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::SortIndicator | 
|---|
| 1468 |  | 
|---|
| 1469 | Indicates which direction the sort indicator should be drawn | 
|---|
| 1470 |  | 
|---|
| 1471 | \value None No sort indicator is needed | 
|---|
| 1472 | \value SortUp Draw an up indicator | 
|---|
| 1473 | \value SortDown Draw a down indicator | 
|---|
| 1474 |  | 
|---|
| 1475 | \sa sortIndicator | 
|---|
| 1476 | */ | 
|---|
| 1477 |  | 
|---|
| 1478 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1479 | \class QStyleOptionButton | 
|---|
| 1480 | \brief The QStyleOptionButton class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 1481 | parameters for drawing buttons. | 
|---|
| 1482 |  | 
|---|
| 1483 | QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 1484 | functions need to draw graphical elements like QPushButton, | 
|---|
| 1485 | QCheckBox, and QRadioButton. | 
|---|
| 1486 |  | 
|---|
| 1487 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 1488 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 1489 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 1490 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 1491 |  | 
|---|
| 1492 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 1493 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 1494 |  | 
|---|
| 1495 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionToolButton | 
|---|
| 1496 | */ | 
|---|
| 1497 |  | 
|---|
| 1498 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1499 | \enum QStyleOptionButton::ButtonFeature | 
|---|
| 1500 |  | 
|---|
| 1501 | This enum describes the different types of features a push button can have. | 
|---|
| 1502 |  | 
|---|
| 1503 | \value None Indicates a normal push button. | 
|---|
| 1504 | \value Flat Indicates a flat push button. | 
|---|
| 1505 | \value HasMenu Indicates that the button has a drop down menu. | 
|---|
| 1506 | \value DefaultButton Indicates that the button is a default button. | 
|---|
| 1507 | \value AutoDefaultButton Indicates that the button is an auto default button. | 
|---|
| 1508 | \value CommandLinkButton Indicates that the button is a Windows Vista type command link. | 
|---|
| 1509 |  | 
|---|
| 1510 | \sa features | 
|---|
| 1511 | */ | 
|---|
| 1512 |  | 
|---|
| 1513 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1514 | Constructs a QStyleOptionButton, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 1515 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 1516 | */ | 
|---|
| 1517 |  | 
|---|
| 1518 | QStyleOptionButton::QStyleOptionButton() | 
|---|
| 1519 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionButton::Version, SO_Button), features(None) | 
|---|
| 1520 | { | 
|---|
| 1521 | } | 
|---|
| 1522 |  | 
|---|
| 1523 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1524 | \internal | 
|---|
| 1525 | */ | 
|---|
| 1526 | QStyleOptionButton::QStyleOptionButton(int version) | 
|---|
| 1527 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Button), features(None) | 
|---|
| 1528 | { | 
|---|
| 1529 | } | 
|---|
| 1530 |  | 
|---|
| 1531 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1532 | \fn QStyleOptionButton::QStyleOptionButton(const QStyleOptionButton &other) | 
|---|
| 1533 |  | 
|---|
| 1534 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 1535 | */ | 
|---|
| 1536 |  | 
|---|
| 1537 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1538 | \enum QStyleOptionButton::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1539 |  | 
|---|
| 1540 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 1541 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1542 |  | 
|---|
| 1543 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Button} for this class). | 
|---|
| 1544 |  | 
|---|
| 1545 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 1546 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 1547 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 1548 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 1549 |  | 
|---|
| 1550 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1551 | */ | 
|---|
| 1552 |  | 
|---|
| 1553 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1554 | \enum QStyleOptionButton::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1555 |  | 
|---|
| 1556 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 1557 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1558 |  | 
|---|
| 1559 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 1560 |  | 
|---|
| 1561 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 1562 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 1563 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 1564 |  | 
|---|
| 1565 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1566 | */ | 
|---|
| 1567 |  | 
|---|
| 1568 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1569 | \variable QStyleOptionButton::features | 
|---|
| 1570 | \brief a bitwise OR of the features that describe this button | 
|---|
| 1571 |  | 
|---|
| 1572 | \sa ButtonFeature | 
|---|
| 1573 | */ | 
|---|
| 1574 |  | 
|---|
| 1575 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1576 | \variable QStyleOptionButton::text | 
|---|
| 1577 | \brief the text of the button | 
|---|
| 1578 |  | 
|---|
| 1579 | The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 1580 | */ | 
|---|
| 1581 |  | 
|---|
| 1582 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1583 | \variable QStyleOptionButton::icon | 
|---|
| 1584 | \brief the icon of the button | 
|---|
| 1585 |  | 
|---|
| 1586 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a | 
|---|
| 1587 | pixmap nor a filename. | 
|---|
| 1588 |  | 
|---|
| 1589 | \sa iconSize | 
|---|
| 1590 | */ | 
|---|
| 1591 |  | 
|---|
| 1592 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1593 | \variable QStyleOptionButton::iconSize | 
|---|
| 1594 | \brief the size of the icon for the button | 
|---|
| 1595 |  | 
|---|
| 1596 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size. | 
|---|
| 1597 | */ | 
|---|
| 1598 |  | 
|---|
| 1599 |  | 
|---|
| 1600 | #ifndef QT_NO_TOOLBAR | 
|---|
| 1601 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1602 | \class QStyleOptionToolBar | 
|---|
| 1603 | \brief The QStyleOptionToolBar class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 1604 | parameters for drawing a toolbar. | 
|---|
| 1605 |  | 
|---|
| 1606 | \since 4.1 | 
|---|
| 1607 |  | 
|---|
| 1608 | QStyleOptionToolBar contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 1609 | functions need to draw QToolBar. | 
|---|
| 1610 |  | 
|---|
| 1611 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 1612 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 1613 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 1614 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 1615 |  | 
|---|
| 1616 | The QStyleOptionToolBar class holds the lineWidth and the | 
|---|
| 1617 | midLineWidth for drawing the widget. It also stores information | 
|---|
| 1618 | about which \l {toolBarArea}{area} the toolbar should be located | 
|---|
| 1619 | in, whether it is movable or not, which position the toolbar line | 
|---|
| 1620 | should have (positionOfLine), and the toolbar's position within | 
|---|
| 1621 | the line (positionWithinLine). | 
|---|
| 1622 |  | 
|---|
| 1623 | In addition, the class provides a couple of enums: The | 
|---|
| 1624 | ToolBarFeature enum is used to describe whether a toolbar is | 
|---|
| 1625 | movable or not, and the ToolBarPosition enum is used to describe | 
|---|
| 1626 | the position of a toolbar line, as well as the toolbar's position | 
|---|
| 1627 | within the line. | 
|---|
| 1628 |  | 
|---|
| 1629 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 1630 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 1631 |  | 
|---|
| 1632 | \sa QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1633 | */ | 
|---|
| 1634 |  | 
|---|
| 1635 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1636 | Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBar, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 1637 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 1638 | */ | 
|---|
| 1639 |  | 
|---|
| 1640 | QStyleOptionToolBar::QStyleOptionToolBar() | 
|---|
| 1641 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_ToolBar), positionOfLine(OnlyOne), positionWithinLine(OnlyOne), | 
|---|
| 1642 | toolBarArea(Qt::TopToolBarArea), features(None), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0) | 
|---|
| 1643 | { | 
|---|
| 1644 | } | 
|---|
| 1645 |  | 
|---|
| 1646 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1647 | \fn QStyleOptionToolBar::QStyleOptionToolBar(const QStyleOptionToolBar &other) | 
|---|
| 1648 |  | 
|---|
| 1649 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 1650 | */ | 
|---|
| 1651 |  | 
|---|
| 1652 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1653 | \internal | 
|---|
| 1654 | */ | 
|---|
| 1655 | QStyleOptionToolBar::QStyleOptionToolBar(int version) | 
|---|
| 1656 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_ToolBar), positionOfLine(OnlyOne), positionWithinLine(OnlyOne), | 
|---|
| 1657 | toolBarArea(Qt::TopToolBarArea), features(None), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0) | 
|---|
| 1658 | { | 
|---|
| 1659 |  | 
|---|
| 1660 | } | 
|---|
| 1661 |  | 
|---|
| 1662 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1663 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBar::ToolBarPosition | 
|---|
| 1664 |  | 
|---|
| 1665 | \image qstyleoptiontoolbar-position.png | 
|---|
| 1666 |  | 
|---|
| 1667 | This enum is used to describe the position of a toolbar line, as | 
|---|
| 1668 | well as the toolbar's position within the line. | 
|---|
| 1669 |  | 
|---|
| 1670 | The order of the positions within a line starts at the top of a | 
|---|
| 1671 | vertical line, and from the left within a horizontal line. The | 
|---|
| 1672 | order of the positions for the lines is always from the the | 
|---|
| 1673 | parent widget's boundary edges. | 
|---|
| 1674 |  | 
|---|
| 1675 | \value Beginning The toolbar is located at the beginning of the line, | 
|---|
| 1676 | or the toolbar line is the first of several lines. There can | 
|---|
| 1677 | only be one toolbar (and only one line) with this position. | 
|---|
| 1678 | \value Middle The toolbar is located in the middle of the line, | 
|---|
| 1679 | or the toolbar line is in the middle of several lines. There can | 
|---|
| 1680 | several toolbars (and lines) with this position. | 
|---|
| 1681 | \value End The toolbar is located at the end of the line, | 
|---|
| 1682 | or the toolbar line is the last of several lines. There can | 
|---|
| 1683 | only be one toolbar (and only one line) with this position. | 
|---|
| 1684 | \value OnlyOne There is only one toolbar or line. This is the default value | 
|---|
| 1685 | of the positionOfLine and positionWithinLine variables. | 
|---|
| 1686 |  | 
|---|
| 1687 | \sa positionWithinLine, positionOfLine | 
|---|
| 1688 | */ | 
|---|
| 1689 |  | 
|---|
| 1690 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1691 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBar::ToolBarFeature | 
|---|
| 1692 |  | 
|---|
| 1693 | This enum is used to describe whether a toolbar is movable or not. | 
|---|
| 1694 |  | 
|---|
| 1695 | \value None The toolbar cannot be moved. The default value. | 
|---|
| 1696 | \value Movable The toolbar is movable, and a handle will appear when | 
|---|
| 1697 | holding the cursor over the toolbar's boundary. | 
|---|
| 1698 |  | 
|---|
| 1699 | \sa features, QToolBar::isMovable() | 
|---|
| 1700 | */ | 
|---|
| 1701 |  | 
|---|
| 1702 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1703 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::positionOfLine | 
|---|
| 1704 |  | 
|---|
| 1705 | This variable holds the position of the toolbar line. | 
|---|
| 1706 |  | 
|---|
| 1707 | The default value is QStyleOptionToolBar::OnlyOne. | 
|---|
| 1708 | */ | 
|---|
| 1709 |  | 
|---|
| 1710 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1711 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::positionWithinLine | 
|---|
| 1712 |  | 
|---|
| 1713 | This variable holds the position of the toolbar within a line. | 
|---|
| 1714 |  | 
|---|
| 1715 | The default value is QStyleOptionToolBar::OnlyOne. | 
|---|
| 1716 | */ | 
|---|
| 1717 |  | 
|---|
| 1718 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1719 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::toolBarArea | 
|---|
| 1720 |  | 
|---|
| 1721 | This variable holds the location for drawing the toolbar. | 
|---|
| 1722 |  | 
|---|
| 1723 | The default value is Qt::TopToolBarArea. | 
|---|
| 1724 |  | 
|---|
| 1725 | \sa Qt::ToolBarArea | 
|---|
| 1726 | */ | 
|---|
| 1727 |  | 
|---|
| 1728 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1729 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::features | 
|---|
| 1730 |  | 
|---|
| 1731 | This variable holds whether the toolbar is movable or not. | 
|---|
| 1732 |  | 
|---|
| 1733 | The default value is \l None. | 
|---|
| 1734 | */ | 
|---|
| 1735 |  | 
|---|
| 1736 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1737 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::lineWidth | 
|---|
| 1738 |  | 
|---|
| 1739 | This variable holds the line width for drawing the toolbar. | 
|---|
| 1740 |  | 
|---|
| 1741 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 1742 | */ | 
|---|
| 1743 |  | 
|---|
| 1744 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1745 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::midLineWidth | 
|---|
| 1746 |  | 
|---|
| 1747 | This variable holds the mid-line width for drawing the toolbar. | 
|---|
| 1748 |  | 
|---|
| 1749 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 1750 | */ | 
|---|
| 1751 |  | 
|---|
| 1752 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1753 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBar::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1754 |  | 
|---|
| 1755 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style | 
|---|
| 1756 | option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1757 |  | 
|---|
| 1758 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ToolBar} for | 
|---|
| 1759 | this class). | 
|---|
| 1760 |  | 
|---|
| 1761 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 1762 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 1763 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 1764 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 1765 |  | 
|---|
| 1766 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1767 | */ | 
|---|
| 1768 |  | 
|---|
| 1769 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1770 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBar::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1771 |  | 
|---|
| 1772 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the | 
|---|
| 1773 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1774 |  | 
|---|
| 1775 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 1776 |  | 
|---|
| 1777 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 1778 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 1779 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 1780 |  | 
|---|
| 1781 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1782 | */ | 
|---|
| 1783 |  | 
|---|
| 1784 | #endif | 
|---|
| 1785 |  | 
|---|
| 1786 | #ifndef QT_NO_TABBAR | 
|---|
| 1787 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1788 | \class QStyleOptionTab | 
|---|
| 1789 | \brief The QStyleOptionTab class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 1790 | parameters for drawing a tab bar. | 
|---|
| 1791 |  | 
|---|
| 1792 | The QStyleOptionTab class is used for drawing several built-in Qt | 
|---|
| 1793 | widgets including \l QTabBar and the panel for \l QTabWidget. Note | 
|---|
| 1794 | that to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in | 
|---|
| 1795 | Qt 4.1 or above, you must use the QStyleOptionFrameV2 subclass. | 
|---|
| 1796 |  | 
|---|
| 1797 | An instance of the QStyleOptiontabV2 class has | 
|---|
| 1798 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} \l SO_Tab and | 
|---|
| 1799 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 1. The type is used internally | 
|---|
| 1800 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to | 
|---|
| 1801 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to | 
|---|
| 1802 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1803 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1804 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking | 
|---|
| 1805 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not | 
|---|
| 1806 | need to check it. | 
|---|
| 1807 |  | 
|---|
| 1808 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both | 
|---|
| 1809 | QStyleOptionTab and QStyleOptionTabV2. | 
|---|
| 1810 |  | 
|---|
| 1811 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 1812 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 1813 |  | 
|---|
| 1814 | \sa QStyleOptionTabV2, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1815 | */ | 
|---|
| 1816 |  | 
|---|
| 1817 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1818 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTab object, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 1819 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 1820 | */ | 
|---|
| 1821 |  | 
|---|
| 1822 | QStyleOptionTab::QStyleOptionTab() | 
|---|
| 1823 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionTab::Version, SO_Tab), | 
|---|
| 1824 | shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth), | 
|---|
| 1825 | row(0), | 
|---|
| 1826 | position(Beginning), | 
|---|
| 1827 | selectedPosition(NotAdjacent), cornerWidgets(QStyleOptionTab::NoCornerWidgets) | 
|---|
| 1828 | { | 
|---|
| 1829 | } | 
|---|
| 1830 |  | 
|---|
| 1831 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1832 | \internal | 
|---|
| 1833 | */ | 
|---|
| 1834 | QStyleOptionTab::QStyleOptionTab(int version) | 
|---|
| 1835 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Tab), | 
|---|
| 1836 | shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth), | 
|---|
| 1837 | row(0), | 
|---|
| 1838 | position(Beginning), | 
|---|
| 1839 | selectedPosition(NotAdjacent), cornerWidgets(QStyleOptionTab::NoCornerWidgets) | 
|---|
| 1840 | { | 
|---|
| 1841 | } | 
|---|
| 1842 |  | 
|---|
| 1843 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1844 | \fn QStyleOptionTab::QStyleOptionTab(const QStyleOptionTab &other) | 
|---|
| 1845 |  | 
|---|
| 1846 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 1847 | */ | 
|---|
| 1848 |  | 
|---|
| 1849 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1850 | \enum QStyleOptionTab::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1851 |  | 
|---|
| 1852 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 1853 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1854 |  | 
|---|
| 1855 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Tab} for this class). | 
|---|
| 1856 |  | 
|---|
| 1857 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 1858 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 1859 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 1860 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 1861 |  | 
|---|
| 1862 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1863 | */ | 
|---|
| 1864 |  | 
|---|
| 1865 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1866 | \enum QStyleOptionTab::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 1867 |  | 
|---|
| 1868 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 1869 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 1870 |  | 
|---|
| 1871 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 1872 |  | 
|---|
| 1873 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 1874 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 1875 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 1876 |  | 
|---|
| 1877 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 1878 | */ | 
|---|
| 1879 |  | 
|---|
| 1880 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1881 | \enum QStyleOptionTab::TabPosition | 
|---|
| 1882 |  | 
|---|
| 1883 | This enum describes the position of the tab. | 
|---|
| 1884 |  | 
|---|
| 1885 | \value Beginning The tab is the first tab in the tab bar. | 
|---|
| 1886 | \value Middle The tab is neither the first nor the last tab in the tab bar. | 
|---|
| 1887 | \value End The tab is the last tab in the tab bar. | 
|---|
| 1888 | \value OnlyOneTab The tab is both the first and the last tab in the tab bar. | 
|---|
| 1889 |  | 
|---|
| 1890 | \sa position | 
|---|
| 1891 | */ | 
|---|
| 1892 |  | 
|---|
| 1893 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1894 | \enum QStyleOptionTab::CornerWidget | 
|---|
| 1895 |  | 
|---|
| 1896 | These flags indicate the corner widgets in a tab. | 
|---|
| 1897 |  | 
|---|
| 1898 | \value NoCornerWidgets  There are no corner widgets | 
|---|
| 1899 | \value LeftCornerWidget  Left corner widget | 
|---|
| 1900 | \value RightCornerWidget Right corner widget | 
|---|
| 1901 |  | 
|---|
| 1902 | \sa cornerWidgets | 
|---|
| 1903 | */ | 
|---|
| 1904 |  | 
|---|
| 1905 | /*! \enum QStyleOptionTab::SelectedPosition | 
|---|
| 1906 |  | 
|---|
| 1907 | This enum describes the position of the selected tab. Some styles | 
|---|
| 1908 | need to draw a tab differently depending on whether or not it is | 
|---|
| 1909 | adjacent to the selected tab. | 
|---|
| 1910 |  | 
|---|
| 1911 | \value NotAdjacent The tab is not adjacent to a selected tab (or is the selected tab). | 
|---|
| 1912 | \value NextIsSelected The next tab (typically the tab on the right) is selected. | 
|---|
| 1913 | \value PreviousIsSelected The previous tab (typically the tab on the left) is selected. | 
|---|
| 1914 |  | 
|---|
| 1915 | \sa selectedPosition | 
|---|
| 1916 | */ | 
|---|
| 1917 |  | 
|---|
| 1918 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1919 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::selectedPosition | 
|---|
| 1920 | \brief the position of the selected tab in relation to this tab | 
|---|
| 1921 |  | 
|---|
| 1922 | The default value is NotAdjacent, i.e. the tab is not adjacent to | 
|---|
| 1923 | a selected tab nor is it the selected tab. | 
|---|
| 1924 | */ | 
|---|
| 1925 |  | 
|---|
| 1926 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1927 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::cornerWidgets | 
|---|
| 1928 | \brief an OR combination of CornerWidget values indicating the | 
|---|
| 1929 | corner widgets of the tab bar | 
|---|
| 1930 |  | 
|---|
| 1931 | The default value is NoCornerWidgets. | 
|---|
| 1932 |  | 
|---|
| 1933 | \sa CornerWidget | 
|---|
| 1934 | */ | 
|---|
| 1935 |  | 
|---|
| 1936 |  | 
|---|
| 1937 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1938 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::shape | 
|---|
| 1939 | \brief the tab shape used to draw the tab; by default | 
|---|
| 1940 | QTabBar::RoundedNorth | 
|---|
| 1941 |  | 
|---|
| 1942 | \sa QTabBar::Shape | 
|---|
| 1943 | */ | 
|---|
| 1944 |  | 
|---|
| 1945 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1946 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::text | 
|---|
| 1947 | \brief the text of the tab | 
|---|
| 1948 |  | 
|---|
| 1949 | The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 1950 | */ | 
|---|
| 1951 |  | 
|---|
| 1952 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1953 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::icon | 
|---|
| 1954 | \brief the icon for the tab | 
|---|
| 1955 |  | 
|---|
| 1956 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a | 
|---|
| 1957 | pixmap nor a filename. | 
|---|
| 1958 | */ | 
|---|
| 1959 |  | 
|---|
| 1960 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1961 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::row | 
|---|
| 1962 | \brief which row the tab is currently in | 
|---|
| 1963 |  | 
|---|
| 1964 | The default value is 0, indicating the front row.  Currently this | 
|---|
| 1965 | property can only be 0. | 
|---|
| 1966 | */ | 
|---|
| 1967 |  | 
|---|
| 1968 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1969 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::position | 
|---|
| 1970 | \brief the position of the tab in the tab bar | 
|---|
| 1971 |  | 
|---|
| 1972 | The default value is \l Beginning, i.e. the tab is the first tab | 
|---|
| 1973 | in the tab bar. | 
|---|
| 1974 | */ | 
|---|
| 1975 |  | 
|---|
| 1976 | /*! | 
|---|
| 1977 | \class QStyleOptionTabV2 | 
|---|
| 1978 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabV2 class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 1979 | parameters necessary for drawing a tabs in Qt 4.1 or above. | 
|---|
| 1980 |  | 
|---|
| 1981 | \since 4.1 | 
|---|
| 1982 |  | 
|---|
| 1983 | An instance of the QStyleOptionTabV2 class has | 
|---|
| 1984 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} \l SO_Tab and | 
|---|
| 1985 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2. The type is used internally | 
|---|
| 1986 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to | 
|---|
| 1987 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to | 
|---|
| 1988 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1989 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 1990 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking | 
|---|
| 1991 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not | 
|---|
| 1992 | need to check it. | 
|---|
| 1993 |  | 
|---|
| 1994 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both | 
|---|
| 1995 | QStyleOptionTab and QStyleOptionTabV2. One way to achieve this is | 
|---|
| 1996 | to use the QStyleOptionTabV2 copy constructor. For example: | 
|---|
| 1997 |  | 
|---|
| 1998 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 3 | 
|---|
| 1999 |  | 
|---|
| 2000 | In the example above: If \c tabOption's version is 1, the extra | 
|---|
| 2001 | member (\l iconSize) will be set to an invalid size for \c tabV2. | 
|---|
| 2002 | If \c tabOption's version is 2, the constructor will simply copy | 
|---|
| 2003 | the \c tab's iconSize. | 
|---|
| 2004 |  | 
|---|
| 2005 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 2006 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 2007 |  | 
|---|
| 2008 | \sa QStyleOptionTab, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 2009 | */ | 
|---|
| 2010 |  | 
|---|
| 2011 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2012 | \enum QStyleOptionTabV2::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2013 |  | 
|---|
| 2014 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2015 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2016 |  | 
|---|
| 2017 | \value Version 2 | 
|---|
| 2018 |  | 
|---|
| 2019 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 2020 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 2021 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2022 |  | 
|---|
| 2023 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2024 | */ | 
|---|
| 2025 |  | 
|---|
| 2026 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2027 | \variable QStyleOptionTabV2::iconSize | 
|---|
| 2028 | \brief the size for the icons | 
|---|
| 2029 |  | 
|---|
| 2030 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size; use | 
|---|
| 2031 | QStyle::pixelMetric() to find the default icon size for tab bars. | 
|---|
| 2032 |  | 
|---|
| 2033 | \sa QTabBar::iconSize() | 
|---|
| 2034 | */ | 
|---|
| 2035 |  | 
|---|
| 2036 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2037 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV2. | 
|---|
| 2038 | */ | 
|---|
| 2039 | QStyleOptionTabV2::QStyleOptionTabV2() | 
|---|
| 2040 | : QStyleOptionTab(Version) | 
|---|
| 2041 | { | 
|---|
| 2042 | } | 
|---|
| 2043 |  | 
|---|
| 2044 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2045 | \internal | 
|---|
| 2046 | */ | 
|---|
| 2047 | QStyleOptionTabV2::QStyleOptionTabV2(int version) | 
|---|
| 2048 | : QStyleOptionTab(version) | 
|---|
| 2049 | { | 
|---|
| 2050 | } | 
|---|
| 2051 |  | 
|---|
| 2052 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2053 | \fn QStyleOptionTabV2::QStyleOptionTabV2(const QStyleOptionTabV2 &other) | 
|---|
| 2054 |  | 
|---|
| 2055 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 2056 | */ | 
|---|
| 2057 |  | 
|---|
| 2058 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2059 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV2 copy of the \a other style option | 
|---|
| 2060 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV2 or QStyleOptionTab | 
|---|
| 2061 | types. | 
|---|
| 2062 |  | 
|---|
| 2063 | If the other style option's version is 1, the new style option's | 
|---|
| 2064 | \c iconSize is set to an invalid value. If its version is 2, its | 
|---|
| 2065 | \c iconSize value is simply copied to the new style option. | 
|---|
| 2066 | */ | 
|---|
| 2067 | QStyleOptionTabV2::QStyleOptionTabV2(const QStyleOptionTab &other) | 
|---|
| 2068 | : QStyleOptionTab(Version) | 
|---|
| 2069 | { | 
|---|
| 2070 | if (const QStyleOptionTabV2 *tab = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabV2 *>(&other)) { | 
|---|
| 2071 | *this = *tab; | 
|---|
| 2072 | } else { | 
|---|
| 2073 | *((QStyleOptionTab *)this) = other; | 
|---|
| 2074 | version = Version; | 
|---|
| 2075 | } | 
|---|
| 2076 | } | 
|---|
| 2077 |  | 
|---|
| 2078 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2079 | Assigns the \a other style option to this QStyleOptionTabV2. The | 
|---|
| 2080 | \a other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV2 or | 
|---|
| 2081 | QStyleOptionTab types. | 
|---|
| 2082 |  | 
|---|
| 2083 | If the other style option's version is 1, this style option's \c | 
|---|
| 2084 | iconSize is set to an invalid size. If its version is 2, its \c | 
|---|
| 2085 | iconSize value is simply copied to this style option. | 
|---|
| 2086 | */ | 
|---|
| 2087 | QStyleOptionTabV2 &QStyleOptionTabV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionTab &other) | 
|---|
| 2088 | { | 
|---|
| 2089 | QStyleOptionTab::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 2090 |  | 
|---|
| 2091 | if (const QStyleOptionTabV2 *tab = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabV2 *>(&other)) | 
|---|
| 2092 | iconSize = tab->iconSize; | 
|---|
| 2093 | else | 
|---|
| 2094 | iconSize = QSize(); | 
|---|
| 2095 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 2096 | } | 
|---|
| 2097 |  | 
|---|
| 2098 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2099 | \class QStyleOptionTabV3 | 
|---|
| 2100 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabV3 class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 2101 | parameters necessary for drawing a tabs in Qt 4.5 or above. | 
|---|
| 2102 |  | 
|---|
| 2103 | \since 4.5 | 
|---|
| 2104 |  | 
|---|
| 2105 | An instance of the QStyleOptionTabV3 class has | 
|---|
| 2106 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} \l SO_Tab and | 
|---|
| 2107 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 3. The type is used internally | 
|---|
| 2108 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to | 
|---|
| 2109 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to | 
|---|
| 2110 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 2111 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 2112 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking | 
|---|
| 2113 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not | 
|---|
| 2114 | need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2115 |  | 
|---|
| 2116 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both | 
|---|
| 2117 | QStyleOptionTab, QStyleOptionTabV2 and QStyleOptionTabV3. | 
|---|
| 2118 | One way to achieve this is to use the QStyleOptionTabV3 copy | 
|---|
| 2119 | constructor. For example: | 
|---|
| 2120 |  | 
|---|
| 2121 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 3 | 
|---|
| 2122 |  | 
|---|
| 2123 | In the example above: If \c tabOption's version is 1, the extra | 
|---|
| 2124 | member (\l{QStyleOptionTabV2::iconSize}{iconSize}) will be set to | 
|---|
| 2125 | an invalid size for \c tabV2.  If \c tabOption's version is 2, the | 
|---|
| 2126 | constructor will simply copy the \c tab's iconSize. | 
|---|
| 2127 |  | 
|---|
| 2128 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 2129 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 2130 |  | 
|---|
| 2131 | \sa QStyleOptionTab, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 2132 | */ | 
|---|
| 2133 |  | 
|---|
| 2134 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2135 | \enum QStyleOptionTabV3::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2136 |  | 
|---|
| 2137 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2138 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2139 |  | 
|---|
| 2140 | \value Version 3 | 
|---|
| 2141 |  | 
|---|
| 2142 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 2143 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 2144 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2145 |  | 
|---|
| 2146 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2147 | */ | 
|---|
| 2148 |  | 
|---|
| 2149 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2150 | \variable QStyleOptionTabV3::documentMode | 
|---|
| 2151 | \brief whether the tabbar is in document mode. | 
|---|
| 2152 |  | 
|---|
| 2153 | The default value is false; | 
|---|
| 2154 | */ | 
|---|
| 2155 |  | 
|---|
| 2156 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2157 | \variable QStyleOptionTabV3::leftButtonSize | 
|---|
| 2158 | \brief the size for the left widget on the tab. | 
|---|
| 2159 |  | 
|---|
| 2160 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size; | 
|---|
| 2161 | */ | 
|---|
| 2162 |  | 
|---|
| 2163 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2164 | \variable QStyleOptionTabV3::rightButtonSize | 
|---|
| 2165 | \brief the size for the right widget on the tab. | 
|---|
| 2166 |  | 
|---|
| 2167 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size; | 
|---|
| 2168 | */ | 
|---|
| 2169 |  | 
|---|
| 2170 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2171 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV3. | 
|---|
| 2172 | */ | 
|---|
| 2173 |  | 
|---|
| 2174 | QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3() | 
|---|
| 2175 | : QStyleOptionTabV2(Version) | 
|---|
| 2176 | , documentMode(false) | 
|---|
| 2177 | { | 
|---|
| 2178 | } | 
|---|
| 2179 |  | 
|---|
| 2180 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2181 | \internal | 
|---|
| 2182 | */ | 
|---|
| 2183 | QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3(int version) | 
|---|
| 2184 | : QStyleOptionTabV2(version) | 
|---|
| 2185 | { | 
|---|
| 2186 | } | 
|---|
| 2187 |  | 
|---|
| 2188 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2189 | \fn QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3(const QStyleOptionTabV3 &other) | 
|---|
| 2190 |  | 
|---|
| 2191 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 2192 | */ | 
|---|
| 2193 |  | 
|---|
| 2194 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2195 | \fn QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3(const QStyleOptionTabV2 &other) | 
|---|
| 2196 |  | 
|---|
| 2197 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 2198 | */ | 
|---|
| 2199 |  | 
|---|
| 2200 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2201 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV3 copy of the \a other style option | 
|---|
| 2202 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV3, QStyleOptionTabV2 | 
|---|
| 2203 | or QStyleOptionTab types. | 
|---|
| 2204 |  | 
|---|
| 2205 | If the other style option's version is 1 or 2, the new style option's | 
|---|
| 2206 | \c leftButtonSize and \c rightButtonSize is set to an invalid value.  If | 
|---|
| 2207 | its version is 3, its \c leftButtonSize and \c rightButtonSize values | 
|---|
| 2208 | are simply copied to the new style option. | 
|---|
| 2209 | */ | 
|---|
| 2210 | QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3(const QStyleOptionTab &other) | 
|---|
| 2211 | : QStyleOptionTabV2(Version) | 
|---|
| 2212 | { | 
|---|
| 2213 | if (const QStyleOptionTabV3 *tab = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabV3 *>(&other)) { | 
|---|
| 2214 | *this = *tab; | 
|---|
| 2215 | } else { | 
|---|
| 2216 | *((QStyleOptionTabV2 *)this) = other; | 
|---|
| 2217 | version = Version; | 
|---|
| 2218 | } | 
|---|
| 2219 | } | 
|---|
| 2220 |  | 
|---|
| 2221 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2222 | Assigns the \a other style option to this QStyleOptionTabV3. The | 
|---|
| 2223 | \a other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV3, | 
|---|
| 2224 | QStyleOptionTabV2 or QStyleOptionTab types. | 
|---|
| 2225 |  | 
|---|
| 2226 | If the other style option's version is 1 or 2, the new style option's | 
|---|
| 2227 | \c leftButtonSize and \c rightButtonSize is set to an invalid value.  If | 
|---|
| 2228 | its version is 3, its \c leftButtonSize and \c rightButtonSize values | 
|---|
| 2229 | are simply copied to the new style option. | 
|---|
| 2230 | */ | 
|---|
| 2231 | QStyleOptionTabV3 &QStyleOptionTabV3::operator=(const QStyleOptionTab &other) | 
|---|
| 2232 | { | 
|---|
| 2233 | QStyleOptionTabV2::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 2234 |  | 
|---|
| 2235 | if (const QStyleOptionTabV3 *tab = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabV3 *>(&other)) { | 
|---|
| 2236 | leftButtonSize = tab->leftButtonSize; | 
|---|
| 2237 | rightButtonSize = tab->rightButtonSize; | 
|---|
| 2238 | } else { | 
|---|
| 2239 | leftButtonSize = QSize(); | 
|---|
| 2240 | rightButtonSize = QSize(); | 
|---|
| 2241 | documentMode = false; | 
|---|
| 2242 | } | 
|---|
| 2243 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 2244 | } | 
|---|
| 2245 |  | 
|---|
| 2246 | #endif // QT_NO_TABBAR | 
|---|
| 2247 |  | 
|---|
| 2248 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2249 | \class QStyleOptionProgressBar | 
|---|
| 2250 | \brief The QStyleOptionProgressBar class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 2251 | parameters necessary for drawing a progress bar. | 
|---|
| 2252 |  | 
|---|
| 2253 | Since Qt 4.1, Qt uses the QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 subclass for | 
|---|
| 2254 | drawing QProgressBar. | 
|---|
| 2255 |  | 
|---|
| 2256 | An instance of the QStyleOptionProgressBar class has type | 
|---|
| 2257 | SO_ProgressBar and version 1. | 
|---|
| 2258 |  | 
|---|
| 2259 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 2260 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 2261 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 2262 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.  The | 
|---|
| 2263 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions | 
|---|
| 2264 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), | 
|---|
| 2265 | you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2266 |  | 
|---|
| 2267 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both | 
|---|
| 2268 | QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOptionProgressBarV2. | 
|---|
| 2269 |  | 
|---|
| 2270 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 2271 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 2272 |  | 
|---|
| 2273 | \sa QStyleOptionProgressBarV2, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 2274 | */ | 
|---|
| 2275 |  | 
|---|
| 2276 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2277 | Constructs a QStyleOptionProgressBar, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 2278 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 2279 | */ | 
|---|
| 2280 |  | 
|---|
| 2281 | QStyleOptionProgressBar::QStyleOptionProgressBar() | 
|---|
| 2282 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionProgressBar::Version, SO_ProgressBar), | 
|---|
| 2283 | minimum(0), maximum(0), progress(0), textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), textVisible(false) | 
|---|
| 2284 | { | 
|---|
| 2285 | } | 
|---|
| 2286 |  | 
|---|
| 2287 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2288 | \internal | 
|---|
| 2289 | */ | 
|---|
| 2290 | QStyleOptionProgressBar::QStyleOptionProgressBar(int version) | 
|---|
| 2291 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_ProgressBar), | 
|---|
| 2292 | minimum(0), maximum(0), progress(0), textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), textVisible(false) | 
|---|
| 2293 | { | 
|---|
| 2294 | } | 
|---|
| 2295 |  | 
|---|
| 2296 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2297 | \fn QStyleOptionProgressBar::QStyleOptionProgressBar(const QStyleOptionProgressBar &other) | 
|---|
| 2298 |  | 
|---|
| 2299 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 2300 | */ | 
|---|
| 2301 |  | 
|---|
| 2302 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2303 | \enum QStyleOptionProgressBar::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2304 |  | 
|---|
| 2305 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2306 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2307 |  | 
|---|
| 2308 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ProgressBar} for this class). | 
|---|
| 2309 |  | 
|---|
| 2310 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 2311 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 2312 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 2313 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 2314 |  | 
|---|
| 2315 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2316 | */ | 
|---|
| 2317 |  | 
|---|
| 2318 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2319 | \enum QStyleOptionProgressBar::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2320 |  | 
|---|
| 2321 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2322 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2323 |  | 
|---|
| 2324 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 2325 |  | 
|---|
| 2326 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 2327 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 2328 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2329 |  | 
|---|
| 2330 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2331 | */ | 
|---|
| 2332 |  | 
|---|
| 2333 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2334 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::minimum | 
|---|
| 2335 | \brief the minimum value for the progress bar | 
|---|
| 2336 |  | 
|---|
| 2337 | This is the minimum value in the progress bar. The default value | 
|---|
| 2338 | is 0. | 
|---|
| 2339 |  | 
|---|
| 2340 | \sa QProgressBar::minimum | 
|---|
| 2341 | */ | 
|---|
| 2342 |  | 
|---|
| 2343 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2344 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::maximum | 
|---|
| 2345 | \brief the maximum value for the progress bar | 
|---|
| 2346 |  | 
|---|
| 2347 | This is the maximum value in the progress bar. The default value | 
|---|
| 2348 | is 0. | 
|---|
| 2349 |  | 
|---|
| 2350 | \sa QProgressBar::maximum | 
|---|
| 2351 | */ | 
|---|
| 2352 |  | 
|---|
| 2353 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2354 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::text | 
|---|
| 2355 | \brief the text for the progress bar | 
|---|
| 2356 |  | 
|---|
| 2357 | The progress bar text is usually just the progress expressed as a | 
|---|
| 2358 | string.  An empty string indicates that the progress bar has not | 
|---|
| 2359 | started yet. The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 2360 |  | 
|---|
| 2361 | \sa QProgressBar::text | 
|---|
| 2362 | */ | 
|---|
| 2363 |  | 
|---|
| 2364 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2365 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::textVisible | 
|---|
| 2366 | \brief a flag indicating whether or not text is visible | 
|---|
| 2367 |  | 
|---|
| 2368 | If this flag is true then the text is visible. Otherwise, the text | 
|---|
| 2369 | is not visible. The default value is false. | 
|---|
| 2370 |  | 
|---|
| 2371 | \sa QProgressBar::textVisible | 
|---|
| 2372 | */ | 
|---|
| 2373 |  | 
|---|
| 2374 |  | 
|---|
| 2375 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2376 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::textAlignment | 
|---|
| 2377 | \brief the text alignment for the text in the QProgressBar | 
|---|
| 2378 |  | 
|---|
| 2379 | This can be used as a guide on where the text should be in the | 
|---|
| 2380 | progress bar. The default value is Qt::AlignLeft. | 
|---|
| 2381 | */ | 
|---|
| 2382 |  | 
|---|
| 2383 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2384 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::progress | 
|---|
| 2385 | \brief the current progress for the progress bar | 
|---|
| 2386 |  | 
|---|
| 2387 | The current progress. A value of QStyleOptionProgressBar::minimum | 
|---|
| 2388 | - 1 indicates that the progress hasn't started yet. The default | 
|---|
| 2389 | value is 0. | 
|---|
| 2390 |  | 
|---|
| 2391 | \sa QProgressBar::value | 
|---|
| 2392 | */ | 
|---|
| 2393 |  | 
|---|
| 2394 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2395 | \class QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 | 
|---|
| 2396 | \brief The QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 2397 | parameters necessary for drawing a progress bar in Qt 4.1 or above. | 
|---|
| 2398 |  | 
|---|
| 2399 | \since 4.1 | 
|---|
| 2400 |  | 
|---|
| 2401 | An instance of this class has \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} | 
|---|
| 2402 | SO_ProgressBar and \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2. | 
|---|
| 2403 |  | 
|---|
| 2404 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 2405 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 2406 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 2407 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The | 
|---|
| 2408 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions | 
|---|
| 2409 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), | 
|---|
| 2410 | you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2411 |  | 
|---|
| 2412 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both | 
|---|
| 2413 | QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOptionProgressBarV2. One way | 
|---|
| 2414 | to achieve this is to use the QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 copy | 
|---|
| 2415 | constructor. For example: | 
|---|
| 2416 |  | 
|---|
| 2417 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 2 | 
|---|
| 2418 |  | 
|---|
| 2419 | In the example above: If the \c progressBarOption's version is 1, | 
|---|
| 2420 | the extra members (\l orientation, \l invertedAppearance, and \l | 
|---|
| 2421 | bottomToTop) are set to default values for \c progressBarV2. If | 
|---|
| 2422 | the \c progressBarOption's version is 2, the constructor will | 
|---|
| 2423 | simply copy the extra members to progressBarV2. | 
|---|
| 2424 |  | 
|---|
| 2425 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 2426 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 2427 |  | 
|---|
| 2428 | \sa QStyleOptionProgressBar, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 2429 | */ | 
|---|
| 2430 |  | 
|---|
| 2431 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2432 | Constructs a QStyleOptionProgressBarV2, initializing he members | 
|---|
| 2433 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 2434 | */ | 
|---|
| 2435 |  | 
|---|
| 2436 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::QStyleOptionProgressBarV2() | 
|---|
| 2437 | : QStyleOptionProgressBar(2), | 
|---|
| 2438 | orientation(Qt::Horizontal), invertedAppearance(false), bottomToTop(false) | 
|---|
| 2439 | { | 
|---|
| 2440 | } | 
|---|
| 2441 |  | 
|---|
| 2442 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2443 | \internal | 
|---|
| 2444 | */ | 
|---|
| 2445 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::QStyleOptionProgressBarV2(int version) | 
|---|
| 2446 | : QStyleOptionProgressBar(version), | 
|---|
| 2447 | orientation(Qt::Horizontal), invertedAppearance(false), bottomToTop(false) | 
|---|
| 2448 | { | 
|---|
| 2449 | } | 
|---|
| 2450 |  | 
|---|
| 2451 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2452 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option which can be either | 
|---|
| 2453 | of the QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 | 
|---|
| 2454 | types. | 
|---|
| 2455 |  | 
|---|
| 2456 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, the extra members (\l | 
|---|
| 2457 | orientation, \l invertedAppearance, and \l bottomToTop) are set | 
|---|
| 2458 | to default values for the new style option. If \a{other}'s version | 
|---|
| 2459 | is 2, the extra members are simply copied. | 
|---|
| 2460 |  | 
|---|
| 2461 | \sa version | 
|---|
| 2462 | */ | 
|---|
| 2463 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::QStyleOptionProgressBarV2(const QStyleOptionProgressBar &other) | 
|---|
| 2464 | : QStyleOptionProgressBar(2), orientation(Qt::Horizontal), invertedAppearance(false), bottomToTop(false) | 
|---|
| 2465 | { | 
|---|
| 2466 | const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 *pb2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 *>(&other); | 
|---|
| 2467 | if (pb2) | 
|---|
| 2468 | *this = *pb2; | 
|---|
| 2469 | else | 
|---|
| 2470 | *((QStyleOptionProgressBar *)this) = other; | 
|---|
| 2471 | } | 
|---|
| 2472 |  | 
|---|
| 2473 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2474 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 2475 | */ | 
|---|
| 2476 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::QStyleOptionProgressBarV2(const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 &other) | 
|---|
| 2477 | : QStyleOptionProgressBar(2), orientation(Qt::Horizontal), invertedAppearance(false), bottomToTop(false) | 
|---|
| 2478 | { | 
|---|
| 2479 | *this = other; | 
|---|
| 2480 | } | 
|---|
| 2481 |  | 
|---|
| 2482 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2483 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a | 
|---|
| 2484 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 | 
|---|
| 2485 | or QStyleOptionProgressBar types. | 
|---|
| 2486 |  | 
|---|
| 2487 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, the extra members | 
|---|
| 2488 | (\l orientation, \l invertedAppearance, and \l bottomToTop) are | 
|---|
| 2489 | set to default values for this style option. If \a{other}'s | 
|---|
| 2490 | version is 2, the extra members are simply copied to this style | 
|---|
| 2491 | option. | 
|---|
| 2492 | */ | 
|---|
| 2493 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 &QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionProgressBar &other) | 
|---|
| 2494 | { | 
|---|
| 2495 | QStyleOptionProgressBar::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 2496 |  | 
|---|
| 2497 | const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 *pb2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 *>(&other); | 
|---|
| 2498 | orientation = pb2 ? pb2->orientation : Qt::Horizontal; | 
|---|
| 2499 | invertedAppearance = pb2 ? pb2->invertedAppearance : false; | 
|---|
| 2500 | bottomToTop = pb2 ? pb2->bottomToTop : false; | 
|---|
| 2501 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 2502 | } | 
|---|
| 2503 |  | 
|---|
| 2504 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2505 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::orientation | 
|---|
| 2506 | \brief the progress bar's orientation (horizontal or vertical); | 
|---|
| 2507 | the default orentation is Qt::Horizontal | 
|---|
| 2508 |  | 
|---|
| 2509 | \sa QProgressBar::orientation | 
|---|
| 2510 | */ | 
|---|
| 2511 |  | 
|---|
| 2512 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2513 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::invertedAppearance | 
|---|
| 2514 | \brief whether the progress bar's appearance is inverted | 
|---|
| 2515 |  | 
|---|
| 2516 | The default value is false. | 
|---|
| 2517 |  | 
|---|
| 2518 | \sa QProgressBar::invertedAppearance | 
|---|
| 2519 | */ | 
|---|
| 2520 |  | 
|---|
| 2521 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2522 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::bottomToTop | 
|---|
| 2523 | \brief whether the text reads from bottom to top when the progress | 
|---|
| 2524 | bar is vertical | 
|---|
| 2525 |  | 
|---|
| 2526 | The default value is false. | 
|---|
| 2527 |  | 
|---|
| 2528 | \sa QProgressBar::textDirection | 
|---|
| 2529 | */ | 
|---|
| 2530 |  | 
|---|
| 2531 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2532 | \enum QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2533 |  | 
|---|
| 2534 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2535 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2536 |  | 
|---|
| 2537 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ProgressBar} for this class). | 
|---|
| 2538 |  | 
|---|
| 2539 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 2540 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 2541 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 2542 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 2543 |  | 
|---|
| 2544 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2545 | */ | 
|---|
| 2546 |  | 
|---|
| 2547 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2548 | \enum QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2549 |  | 
|---|
| 2550 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2551 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2552 |  | 
|---|
| 2553 | \value Version 2 | 
|---|
| 2554 |  | 
|---|
| 2555 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 2556 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 2557 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2558 |  | 
|---|
| 2559 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2560 | */ | 
|---|
| 2561 |  | 
|---|
| 2562 |  | 
|---|
| 2563 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2564 | \class QStyleOptionMenuItem | 
|---|
| 2565 | \brief The QStyleOptionMenuItem class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 2566 | parameter necessary for drawing a menu item. | 
|---|
| 2567 |  | 
|---|
| 2568 | QStyleOptionMenuItem contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 2569 | functions need to draw the menu items from \l QMenu. It is also | 
|---|
| 2570 | used for drawing other menu-related widgets. | 
|---|
| 2571 |  | 
|---|
| 2572 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 2573 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 2574 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 2575 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 2576 |  | 
|---|
| 2577 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 2578 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 2579 |  | 
|---|
| 2580 | \sa QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 2581 | */ | 
|---|
| 2582 |  | 
|---|
| 2583 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2584 | Constructs a QStyleOptionMenuItem, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 2585 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 2586 | */ | 
|---|
| 2587 |  | 
|---|
| 2588 | QStyleOptionMenuItem::QStyleOptionMenuItem() | 
|---|
| 2589 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionMenuItem::Version, SO_MenuItem), menuItemType(Normal), | 
|---|
| 2590 | checkType(NotCheckable), checked(false), menuHasCheckableItems(true), maxIconWidth(0), tabWidth(0) | 
|---|
| 2591 | { | 
|---|
| 2592 | } | 
|---|
| 2593 |  | 
|---|
| 2594 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2595 | \internal | 
|---|
| 2596 | */ | 
|---|
| 2597 | QStyleOptionMenuItem::QStyleOptionMenuItem(int version) | 
|---|
| 2598 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_MenuItem), menuItemType(Normal), | 
|---|
| 2599 | checkType(NotCheckable), checked(false), menuHasCheckableItems(true), maxIconWidth(0), tabWidth(0) | 
|---|
| 2600 | { | 
|---|
| 2601 | } | 
|---|
| 2602 |  | 
|---|
| 2603 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2604 | \fn QStyleOptionMenuItem::QStyleOptionMenuItem(const QStyleOptionMenuItem &other) | 
|---|
| 2605 |  | 
|---|
| 2606 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 2607 | */ | 
|---|
| 2608 |  | 
|---|
| 2609 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2610 | \enum QStyleOptionMenuItem::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2611 |  | 
|---|
| 2612 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2613 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2614 |  | 
|---|
| 2615 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_MenuItem} for this class). | 
|---|
| 2616 |  | 
|---|
| 2617 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 2618 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 2619 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 2620 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 2621 |  | 
|---|
| 2622 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2623 | */ | 
|---|
| 2624 |  | 
|---|
| 2625 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2626 | \enum QStyleOptionMenuItem::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2627 |  | 
|---|
| 2628 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2629 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2630 |  | 
|---|
| 2631 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 2632 |  | 
|---|
| 2633 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 2634 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 2635 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2636 |  | 
|---|
| 2637 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2638 | */ | 
|---|
| 2639 |  | 
|---|
| 2640 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2641 | \enum QStyleOptionMenuItem::MenuItemType | 
|---|
| 2642 |  | 
|---|
| 2643 | This enum indicates the type of menu item that the structure describes. | 
|---|
| 2644 |  | 
|---|
| 2645 | \value Normal A normal menu item. | 
|---|
| 2646 | \value DefaultItem A menu item that is the default action as specified with \l QMenu::defaultAction(). | 
|---|
| 2647 | \value Separator A menu separator. | 
|---|
| 2648 | \value SubMenu Indicates the menu item points to a sub-menu. | 
|---|
| 2649 | \value Scroller A popup menu scroller (currently only used on Mac OS X). | 
|---|
| 2650 | \value TearOff A tear-off handle for the menu. | 
|---|
| 2651 | \value Margin The margin of the menu. | 
|---|
| 2652 | \value EmptyArea The empty area of the menu. | 
|---|
| 2653 |  | 
|---|
| 2654 | \sa menuItemType | 
|---|
| 2655 | */ | 
|---|
| 2656 |  | 
|---|
| 2657 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2658 | \enum QStyleOptionMenuItem::CheckType | 
|---|
| 2659 |  | 
|---|
| 2660 | This enum is used to indicate whether or not a check mark should be | 
|---|
| 2661 | drawn for the item, or even if it should be drawn at all. | 
|---|
| 2662 |  | 
|---|
| 2663 | \value NotCheckable The item is not checkable. | 
|---|
| 2664 | \value Exclusive The item is an exclusive check item (like a radio button). | 
|---|
| 2665 | \value NonExclusive The item is a non-exclusive check item (like a check box). | 
|---|
| 2666 |  | 
|---|
| 2667 | \sa checkType, QAction::checkable, QAction::checked, QActionGroup::exclusive | 
|---|
| 2668 | */ | 
|---|
| 2669 |  | 
|---|
| 2670 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2671 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::menuItemType | 
|---|
| 2672 | \brief the type of menu item | 
|---|
| 2673 |  | 
|---|
| 2674 | The default value is \l Normal. | 
|---|
| 2675 |  | 
|---|
| 2676 | \sa MenuItemType | 
|---|
| 2677 | */ | 
|---|
| 2678 |  | 
|---|
| 2679 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2680 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::checkType | 
|---|
| 2681 | \brief the type of checkmark of the menu item | 
|---|
| 2682 |  | 
|---|
| 2683 | The default value is \l NotCheckable. | 
|---|
| 2684 |  | 
|---|
| 2685 | \sa CheckType | 
|---|
| 2686 | */ | 
|---|
| 2687 |  | 
|---|
| 2688 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2689 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::checked | 
|---|
| 2690 | \brief whether the menu item is checked or not | 
|---|
| 2691 |  | 
|---|
| 2692 | The default value is false. | 
|---|
| 2693 | */ | 
|---|
| 2694 |  | 
|---|
| 2695 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2696 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::menuHasCheckableItems | 
|---|
| 2697 | \brief whether the menu as a whole has checkable items or not | 
|---|
| 2698 |  | 
|---|
| 2699 | The default value is true. | 
|---|
| 2700 |  | 
|---|
| 2701 | If this option is set to false, then the menu has no checkable | 
|---|
| 2702 | items. This makes it possible for GUI styles to save some | 
|---|
| 2703 | horizontal space that would normally be used for the check column. | 
|---|
| 2704 | */ | 
|---|
| 2705 |  | 
|---|
| 2706 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2707 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::menuRect | 
|---|
| 2708 | \brief the rectangle for the entire menu | 
|---|
| 2709 |  | 
|---|
| 2710 | The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both | 
|---|
| 2711 | the width and the height set to 0. | 
|---|
| 2712 | */ | 
|---|
| 2713 |  | 
|---|
| 2714 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2715 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::text | 
|---|
| 2716 | \brief the text for the menu item | 
|---|
| 2717 |  | 
|---|
| 2718 | Note that the text format is something like this "Menu | 
|---|
| 2719 | text\bold{\\t}Shortcut". | 
|---|
| 2720 |  | 
|---|
| 2721 | If the menu item doesn't have a shortcut, it will just contain the | 
|---|
| 2722 | menu item's text. The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 2723 | */ | 
|---|
| 2724 |  | 
|---|
| 2725 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2726 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::icon | 
|---|
| 2727 | \brief the icon for the menu item | 
|---|
| 2728 |  | 
|---|
| 2729 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a | 
|---|
| 2730 | pixmap nor a filename. | 
|---|
| 2731 | */ | 
|---|
| 2732 |  | 
|---|
| 2733 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2734 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::maxIconWidth | 
|---|
| 2735 | \brief the maximum icon width for the icon in the menu item | 
|---|
| 2736 |  | 
|---|
| 2737 | This can be used for drawing the icon into the correct place or | 
|---|
| 2738 | properly aligning items. The variable must be set regardless of | 
|---|
| 2739 | whether or not the menu item has an icon. The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 2740 | */ | 
|---|
| 2741 |  | 
|---|
| 2742 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2743 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::tabWidth | 
|---|
| 2744 | \brief the tab width for the menu item | 
|---|
| 2745 |  | 
|---|
| 2746 | The tab width is the distance between the text of the menu item | 
|---|
| 2747 | and the shortcut. The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 2748 | */ | 
|---|
| 2749 |  | 
|---|
| 2750 |  | 
|---|
| 2751 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2752 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::font | 
|---|
| 2753 | \brief the font used for the menu item text | 
|---|
| 2754 |  | 
|---|
| 2755 | This is the font that should be used for drawing the menu text | 
|---|
| 2756 | minus the shortcut. The shortcut is usually drawn using the | 
|---|
| 2757 | painter's font. By default, the application's default font is | 
|---|
| 2758 | used. | 
|---|
| 2759 | */ | 
|---|
| 2760 |  | 
|---|
| 2761 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2762 | \class QStyleOptionComplex | 
|---|
| 2763 | \brief The QStyleOptionComplex class is used to hold parameters that are | 
|---|
| 2764 | common to all complex controls. | 
|---|
| 2765 |  | 
|---|
| 2766 | This class is not used on its own. Instead it is used to derive | 
|---|
| 2767 | other complex control options, for example QStyleOptionSlider and | 
|---|
| 2768 | QStyleOptionSpinBox. | 
|---|
| 2769 |  | 
|---|
| 2770 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 2771 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). | 
|---|
| 2772 |  | 
|---|
| 2773 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 2774 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 2775 |  | 
|---|
| 2776 | \sa QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 2777 | */ | 
|---|
| 2778 |  | 
|---|
| 2779 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2780 | Constructs a QStyleOptionComplex of the specified \a type and \a | 
|---|
| 2781 | version, initializing the member variables to their default | 
|---|
| 2782 | values. This constructor is usually called by subclasses. | 
|---|
| 2783 | */ | 
|---|
| 2784 |  | 
|---|
| 2785 | QStyleOptionComplex::QStyleOptionComplex(int version, int type) | 
|---|
| 2786 | : QStyleOption(version, type), subControls(QStyle::SC_All), activeSubControls(QStyle::SC_None) | 
|---|
| 2787 | { | 
|---|
| 2788 | } | 
|---|
| 2789 |  | 
|---|
| 2790 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2791 | \fn QStyleOptionComplex::QStyleOptionComplex(const QStyleOptionComplex &other) | 
|---|
| 2792 |  | 
|---|
| 2793 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 2794 | */ | 
|---|
| 2795 |  | 
|---|
| 2796 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2797 | \enum QStyleOptionComplex::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2798 |  | 
|---|
| 2799 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2800 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2801 |  | 
|---|
| 2802 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Complex} for this class). | 
|---|
| 2803 |  | 
|---|
| 2804 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 2805 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 2806 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 2807 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 2808 |  | 
|---|
| 2809 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2810 | */ | 
|---|
| 2811 |  | 
|---|
| 2812 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2813 | \enum QStyleOptionComplex::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2814 |  | 
|---|
| 2815 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2816 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2817 |  | 
|---|
| 2818 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 2819 |  | 
|---|
| 2820 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 2821 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 2822 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2823 |  | 
|---|
| 2824 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2825 | */ | 
|---|
| 2826 |  | 
|---|
| 2827 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2828 | \variable QStyleOptionComplex::subControls | 
|---|
| 2829 |  | 
|---|
| 2830 | This variable holds a bitwise OR of the \l{QStyle::SubControl} | 
|---|
| 2831 | {sub-controls} to be drawn for the complex control. | 
|---|
| 2832 |  | 
|---|
| 2833 | The default value is QStyle::SC_All. | 
|---|
| 2834 |  | 
|---|
| 2835 | \sa QStyle::SubControl | 
|---|
| 2836 | */ | 
|---|
| 2837 |  | 
|---|
| 2838 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2839 | \variable QStyleOptionComplex::activeSubControls | 
|---|
| 2840 |  | 
|---|
| 2841 | This variable holds a bitwise OR of the \l{QStyle::SubControl} | 
|---|
| 2842 | {sub-controls} that are active for the complex control. | 
|---|
| 2843 |  | 
|---|
| 2844 | The default value is QStyle::SC_None. | 
|---|
| 2845 |  | 
|---|
| 2846 | \sa QStyle::SubControl | 
|---|
| 2847 | */ | 
|---|
| 2848 |  | 
|---|
| 2849 | #ifndef QT_NO_SLIDER | 
|---|
| 2850 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2851 | \class QStyleOptionSlider | 
|---|
| 2852 | \brief The QStyleOptionSlider class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 2853 | parameters needed for drawing a slider. | 
|---|
| 2854 |  | 
|---|
| 2855 | QStyleOptionSlider contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 2856 | functions need to draw QSlider and QScrollBar. | 
|---|
| 2857 |  | 
|---|
| 2858 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 2859 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 2860 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 2861 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 2862 |  | 
|---|
| 2863 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 2864 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 2865 |  | 
|---|
| 2866 | \sa QStyleOptionComplex, QSlider, QScrollBar | 
|---|
| 2867 | */ | 
|---|
| 2868 |  | 
|---|
| 2869 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2870 | Constructs a QStyleOptionSlider, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 2871 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 2872 | */ | 
|---|
| 2873 |  | 
|---|
| 2874 | QStyleOptionSlider::QStyleOptionSlider() | 
|---|
| 2875 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_Slider), orientation(Qt::Horizontal), minimum(0), maximum(0), | 
|---|
| 2876 | tickPosition(QSlider::NoTicks), tickInterval(0), upsideDown(false), | 
|---|
| 2877 | sliderPosition(0), sliderValue(0), singleStep(0), pageStep(0), notchTarget(0.0), | 
|---|
| 2878 | dialWrapping(false) | 
|---|
| 2879 | { | 
|---|
| 2880 | } | 
|---|
| 2881 |  | 
|---|
| 2882 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2883 | \internal | 
|---|
| 2884 | */ | 
|---|
| 2885 | QStyleOptionSlider::QStyleOptionSlider(int version) | 
|---|
| 2886 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_Slider), orientation(Qt::Horizontal), minimum(0), maximum(0), | 
|---|
| 2887 | tickPosition(QSlider::NoTicks), tickInterval(0), upsideDown(false), | 
|---|
| 2888 | sliderPosition(0), sliderValue(0), singleStep(0), pageStep(0), notchTarget(0.0), | 
|---|
| 2889 | dialWrapping(false) | 
|---|
| 2890 | { | 
|---|
| 2891 | } | 
|---|
| 2892 |  | 
|---|
| 2893 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2894 | \fn QStyleOptionSlider::QStyleOptionSlider(const QStyleOptionSlider &other) | 
|---|
| 2895 |  | 
|---|
| 2896 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 2897 | */ | 
|---|
| 2898 |  | 
|---|
| 2899 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2900 | \enum QStyleOptionSlider::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2901 |  | 
|---|
| 2902 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2903 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2904 |  | 
|---|
| 2905 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Slider} for this class). | 
|---|
| 2906 |  | 
|---|
| 2907 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 2908 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 2909 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 2910 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 2911 |  | 
|---|
| 2912 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2913 | */ | 
|---|
| 2914 |  | 
|---|
| 2915 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2916 | \enum QStyleOptionSlider::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 2917 |  | 
|---|
| 2918 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 2919 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 2920 |  | 
|---|
| 2921 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 2922 |  | 
|---|
| 2923 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 2924 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 2925 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 2926 |  | 
|---|
| 2927 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 2928 | */ | 
|---|
| 2929 |  | 
|---|
| 2930 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2931 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::orientation | 
|---|
| 2932 | \brief the slider's orientation (horizontal or vertical) | 
|---|
| 2933 |  | 
|---|
| 2934 | The default orientation is Qt::Horizontal. | 
|---|
| 2935 |  | 
|---|
| 2936 | \sa Qt::Orientation | 
|---|
| 2937 | */ | 
|---|
| 2938 |  | 
|---|
| 2939 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2940 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::minimum | 
|---|
| 2941 | \brief the minimum value for the slider | 
|---|
| 2942 |  | 
|---|
| 2943 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 2944 | */ | 
|---|
| 2945 |  | 
|---|
| 2946 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2947 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::maximum | 
|---|
| 2948 | \brief the maximum value for the slider | 
|---|
| 2949 |  | 
|---|
| 2950 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 2951 | */ | 
|---|
| 2952 |  | 
|---|
| 2953 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2954 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::tickPosition | 
|---|
| 2955 | \brief the position of the slider's tick marks, if any | 
|---|
| 2956 |  | 
|---|
| 2957 | The default value is QSlider::NoTicks. | 
|---|
| 2958 |  | 
|---|
| 2959 | \sa QSlider::TickPosition | 
|---|
| 2960 | */ | 
|---|
| 2961 |  | 
|---|
| 2962 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2963 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::tickInterval | 
|---|
| 2964 | \brief the interval that should be drawn between tick marks | 
|---|
| 2965 |  | 
|---|
| 2966 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 2967 | */ | 
|---|
| 2968 |  | 
|---|
| 2969 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2970 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::notchTarget | 
|---|
| 2971 | \brief the number of pixel between notches | 
|---|
| 2972 |  | 
|---|
| 2973 | The default value is 0.0. | 
|---|
| 2974 |  | 
|---|
| 2975 | \sa QDial::notchTarget() | 
|---|
| 2976 | */ | 
|---|
| 2977 |  | 
|---|
| 2978 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2979 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::dialWrapping | 
|---|
| 2980 | \brief whether the dial should wrap or not | 
|---|
| 2981 |  | 
|---|
| 2982 | The default value is false, i.e. the dial is not wrapped. | 
|---|
| 2983 |  | 
|---|
| 2984 | \sa QDial::wrapping() | 
|---|
| 2985 | */ | 
|---|
| 2986 |  | 
|---|
| 2987 | /*! | 
|---|
| 2988 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::upsideDown | 
|---|
| 2989 | \brief the slider control orientation | 
|---|
| 2990 |  | 
|---|
| 2991 | Normally a slider increases as it moves up or to the right; | 
|---|
| 2992 | upsideDown indicates that it should do the opposite (increase as | 
|---|
| 2993 | it moves down or to the left).  The default value is false, | 
|---|
| 2994 | i.e. the slider increases as it moves up or to the right. | 
|---|
| 2995 |  | 
|---|
| 2996 | \sa QStyle::sliderPositionFromValue(), | 
|---|
| 2997 | QStyle::sliderValueFromPosition(), | 
|---|
| 2998 | QAbstractSlider::invertedAppearance | 
|---|
| 2999 | */ | 
|---|
| 3000 |  | 
|---|
| 3001 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3002 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::sliderPosition | 
|---|
| 3003 | \brief the position of the slider handle | 
|---|
| 3004 |  | 
|---|
| 3005 | If the slider has active feedback (i.e., | 
|---|
| 3006 | QAbstractSlider::tracking is true), this value will be the same as | 
|---|
| 3007 | \l sliderValue. Otherwise, it will have the current position of | 
|---|
| 3008 | the handle. The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 3009 |  | 
|---|
| 3010 | \sa QAbstractSlider::tracking, sliderValue | 
|---|
| 3011 | */ | 
|---|
| 3012 |  | 
|---|
| 3013 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3014 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::sliderValue | 
|---|
| 3015 | \brief the value of the slider | 
|---|
| 3016 |  | 
|---|
| 3017 | If the slider has active feedback (i.e., | 
|---|
| 3018 | QAbstractSlider::tracking is true), this value will be the same | 
|---|
| 3019 | as \l sliderPosition. Otherwise, it will have the value the | 
|---|
| 3020 | slider had before the mouse was pressed. | 
|---|
| 3021 |  | 
|---|
| 3022 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 3023 |  | 
|---|
| 3024 | \sa QAbstractSlider::tracking sliderPosition | 
|---|
| 3025 | */ | 
|---|
| 3026 |  | 
|---|
| 3027 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3028 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::singleStep | 
|---|
| 3029 | \brief the size of the single step of the slider | 
|---|
| 3030 |  | 
|---|
| 3031 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 3032 |  | 
|---|
| 3033 | \sa QAbstractSlider::singleStep | 
|---|
| 3034 | */ | 
|---|
| 3035 |  | 
|---|
| 3036 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3037 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::pageStep | 
|---|
| 3038 | \brief the size of the page step of the slider | 
|---|
| 3039 |  | 
|---|
| 3040 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 3041 |  | 
|---|
| 3042 | \sa QAbstractSlider::pageStep | 
|---|
| 3043 | */ | 
|---|
| 3044 | #endif // QT_NO_SLIDER | 
|---|
| 3045 |  | 
|---|
| 3046 | #ifndef QT_NO_SPINBOX | 
|---|
| 3047 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3048 | \class QStyleOptionSpinBox | 
|---|
| 3049 | \brief The QStyleOptionSpinBox class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 3050 | parameters necessary for drawing a spin box. | 
|---|
| 3051 |  | 
|---|
| 3052 | QStyleOptionSpinBox contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 3053 | functions need to draw QSpinBox and QDateTimeEdit. | 
|---|
| 3054 |  | 
|---|
| 3055 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 3056 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 3057 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 3058 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 3059 |  | 
|---|
| 3060 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 3061 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 3062 |  | 
|---|
| 3063 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex | 
|---|
| 3064 | */ | 
|---|
| 3065 |  | 
|---|
| 3066 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3067 | Constructs a QStyleOptionSpinBox, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 3068 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 3069 | */ | 
|---|
| 3070 |  | 
|---|
| 3071 | QStyleOptionSpinBox::QStyleOptionSpinBox() | 
|---|
| 3072 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_SpinBox), buttonSymbols(QAbstractSpinBox::UpDownArrows), | 
|---|
| 3073 | stepEnabled(QAbstractSpinBox::StepNone), frame(false) | 
|---|
| 3074 | { | 
|---|
| 3075 | } | 
|---|
| 3076 |  | 
|---|
| 3077 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3078 | \internal | 
|---|
| 3079 | */ | 
|---|
| 3080 | QStyleOptionSpinBox::QStyleOptionSpinBox(int version) | 
|---|
| 3081 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_SpinBox), buttonSymbols(QAbstractSpinBox::UpDownArrows), | 
|---|
| 3082 | stepEnabled(QAbstractSpinBox::StepNone), frame(false) | 
|---|
| 3083 | { | 
|---|
| 3084 | } | 
|---|
| 3085 |  | 
|---|
| 3086 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3087 | \fn QStyleOptionSpinBox::QStyleOptionSpinBox(const QStyleOptionSpinBox &other) | 
|---|
| 3088 |  | 
|---|
| 3089 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 3090 | */ | 
|---|
| 3091 |  | 
|---|
| 3092 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3093 | \enum QStyleOptionSpinBox::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3094 |  | 
|---|
| 3095 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3096 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3097 |  | 
|---|
| 3098 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_SpinBox} for this class). | 
|---|
| 3099 |  | 
|---|
| 3100 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 3101 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 3102 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 3103 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 3104 |  | 
|---|
| 3105 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3106 | */ | 
|---|
| 3107 |  | 
|---|
| 3108 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3109 | \enum QStyleOptionSpinBox::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3110 |  | 
|---|
| 3111 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3112 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3113 |  | 
|---|
| 3114 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 3115 |  | 
|---|
| 3116 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 3117 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 3118 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 3119 |  | 
|---|
| 3120 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3121 | */ | 
|---|
| 3122 |  | 
|---|
| 3123 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3124 | \variable QStyleOptionSpinBox::buttonSymbols | 
|---|
| 3125 | \brief the type of button symbols to draw for the spin box | 
|---|
| 3126 |  | 
|---|
| 3127 | The default value is QAbstractSpinBox::UpDownArrows specufying | 
|---|
| 3128 | little arrows in the classic style. | 
|---|
| 3129 |  | 
|---|
| 3130 | \sa QAbstractSpinBox::ButtonSymbols | 
|---|
| 3131 | */ | 
|---|
| 3132 |  | 
|---|
| 3133 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3134 | \variable QStyleOptionSpinBox::stepEnabled | 
|---|
| 3135 | \brief which buttons of the spin box that are enabled | 
|---|
| 3136 |  | 
|---|
| 3137 | The default value is QAbstractSpinBox::StepNone. | 
|---|
| 3138 |  | 
|---|
| 3139 | \sa QAbstractSpinBox::StepEnabled | 
|---|
| 3140 | */ | 
|---|
| 3141 |  | 
|---|
| 3142 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3143 | \variable QStyleOptionSpinBox::frame | 
|---|
| 3144 | \brief whether the spin box has a frame | 
|---|
| 3145 |  | 
|---|
| 3146 | The default value is false, i.e. the spin box has no frame. | 
|---|
| 3147 | */ | 
|---|
| 3148 | #endif // QT_NO_SPINBOX | 
|---|
| 3149 |  | 
|---|
| 3150 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3151 | \class QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem | 
|---|
| 3152 | \brief The QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem class is used to describe an | 
|---|
| 3153 | item drawn in a Q3ListView. | 
|---|
| 3154 |  | 
|---|
| 3155 | This class is used for drawing the compatibility Q3ListView's | 
|---|
| 3156 | items. \bold {It is not recommended for new classes}. | 
|---|
| 3157 |  | 
|---|
| 3158 | QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem contains all the information that | 
|---|
| 3159 | QStyle functions need to draw the Q3ListView items. | 
|---|
| 3160 |  | 
|---|
| 3161 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 3162 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 3163 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 3164 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 3165 |  | 
|---|
| 3166 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 3167 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 3168 |  | 
|---|
| 3169 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionQ3ListView, Q3ListViewItem | 
|---|
| 3170 | */ | 
|---|
| 3171 |  | 
|---|
| 3172 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3173 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::Q3ListViewItemFeature | 
|---|
| 3174 |  | 
|---|
| 3175 | This enum describes the features a list view item can have. | 
|---|
| 3176 |  | 
|---|
| 3177 | \value None A standard item. | 
|---|
| 3178 | \value Expandable The item has children that can be shown. | 
|---|
| 3179 | \value MultiLine The item is more than one line tall. | 
|---|
| 3180 | \value Visible The item is visible. | 
|---|
| 3181 | \value ParentControl The item's parent is a type of item control (Q3CheckListItem::Controller). | 
|---|
| 3182 |  | 
|---|
| 3183 | \sa features, Q3ListViewItem::isVisible(), Q3ListViewItem::multiLinesEnabled(), | 
|---|
| 3184 | Q3ListViewItem::isExpandable() | 
|---|
| 3185 | */ | 
|---|
| 3186 |  | 
|---|
| 3187 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3188 | Constructs a QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 3189 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 3190 | */ | 
|---|
| 3191 |  | 
|---|
| 3192 | QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem() | 
|---|
| 3193 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_Q3ListViewItem), features(None), height(0), totalHeight(0), | 
|---|
| 3194 | itemY(0), childCount(0) | 
|---|
| 3195 | { | 
|---|
| 3196 | } | 
|---|
| 3197 |  | 
|---|
| 3198 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3199 | \internal | 
|---|
| 3200 | */ | 
|---|
| 3201 | QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem(int version) | 
|---|
| 3202 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Q3ListViewItem), features(None), height(0), totalHeight(0), | 
|---|
| 3203 | itemY(0), childCount(0) | 
|---|
| 3204 | { | 
|---|
| 3205 | } | 
|---|
| 3206 |  | 
|---|
| 3207 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3208 | \fn QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem(const QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem &other) | 
|---|
| 3209 |  | 
|---|
| 3210 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 3211 | */ | 
|---|
| 3212 |  | 
|---|
| 3213 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3214 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3215 |  | 
|---|
| 3216 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3217 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3218 |  | 
|---|
| 3219 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Q3ListViewItem} for this class). | 
|---|
| 3220 |  | 
|---|
| 3221 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 3222 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 3223 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 3224 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 3225 |  | 
|---|
| 3226 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3227 | */ | 
|---|
| 3228 |  | 
|---|
| 3229 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3230 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3231 |  | 
|---|
| 3232 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3233 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3234 |  | 
|---|
| 3235 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 3236 |  | 
|---|
| 3237 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 3238 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 3239 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 3240 |  | 
|---|
| 3241 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3242 | */ | 
|---|
| 3243 |  | 
|---|
| 3244 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3245 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::features | 
|---|
| 3246 | \brief the features for this item | 
|---|
| 3247 |  | 
|---|
| 3248 | This variable is a bitwise OR of the features of the item. The deafult value is \l None. | 
|---|
| 3249 |  | 
|---|
| 3250 | \sa Q3ListViewItemFeature | 
|---|
| 3251 | */ | 
|---|
| 3252 |  | 
|---|
| 3253 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3254 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::height | 
|---|
| 3255 | \brief the height of the item | 
|---|
| 3256 |  | 
|---|
| 3257 | This doesn't include the height of the item's children. The default height is 0. | 
|---|
| 3258 |  | 
|---|
| 3259 | \sa Q3ListViewItem::height() | 
|---|
| 3260 | */ | 
|---|
| 3261 |  | 
|---|
| 3262 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3263 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::totalHeight | 
|---|
| 3264 | \brief the total height of the item, including its children | 
|---|
| 3265 |  | 
|---|
| 3266 | The default total height is 0. | 
|---|
| 3267 |  | 
|---|
| 3268 | \sa Q3ListViewItem::totalHeight() | 
|---|
| 3269 | */ | 
|---|
| 3270 |  | 
|---|
| 3271 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3272 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::itemY | 
|---|
| 3273 | \brief the Y-coordinate for the item | 
|---|
| 3274 |  | 
|---|
| 3275 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 3276 |  | 
|---|
| 3277 | \sa Q3ListViewItem::itemPos() | 
|---|
| 3278 | */ | 
|---|
| 3279 |  | 
|---|
| 3280 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3281 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::childCount | 
|---|
| 3282 | \brief the number of children the item has | 
|---|
| 3283 | */ | 
|---|
| 3284 |  | 
|---|
| 3285 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3286 | \class QStyleOptionQ3ListView | 
|---|
| 3287 | \brief The QStyleOptionQ3ListView class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 3288 | parameters for drawing a Q3ListView. | 
|---|
| 3289 |  | 
|---|
| 3290 | This class is used for drawing the compatibility Q3ListView. \bold | 
|---|
| 3291 | {It is not recommended for new classes}. | 
|---|
| 3292 |  | 
|---|
| 3293 | QStyleOptionQ3ListView contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 3294 | functions need to draw Q3ListView. | 
|---|
| 3295 |  | 
|---|
| 3296 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 3297 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 3298 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 3299 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 3300 |  | 
|---|
| 3301 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 3302 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 3303 |  | 
|---|
| 3304 | \sa QStyleOptionComplex, Q3ListView, QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem | 
|---|
| 3305 | */ | 
|---|
| 3306 |  | 
|---|
| 3307 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3308 | Creates a QStyleOptionQ3ListView, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 3309 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 3310 | */ | 
|---|
| 3311 |  | 
|---|
| 3312 | QStyleOptionQ3ListView::QStyleOptionQ3ListView() | 
|---|
| 3313 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_Q3ListView), viewportBGRole(QPalette::Base), | 
|---|
| 3314 | sortColumn(0), itemMargin(0), treeStepSize(0), rootIsDecorated(false) | 
|---|
| 3315 | { | 
|---|
| 3316 | } | 
|---|
| 3317 |  | 
|---|
| 3318 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3319 | \internal | 
|---|
| 3320 | */ | 
|---|
| 3321 | QStyleOptionQ3ListView::QStyleOptionQ3ListView(int version) | 
|---|
| 3322 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_Q3ListView),  viewportBGRole(QPalette::Base), | 
|---|
| 3323 | sortColumn(0), itemMargin(0), treeStepSize(0), rootIsDecorated(false) | 
|---|
| 3324 | { | 
|---|
| 3325 | } | 
|---|
| 3326 |  | 
|---|
| 3327 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3328 | \fn QStyleOptionQ3ListView::QStyleOptionQ3ListView(const QStyleOptionQ3ListView &other) | 
|---|
| 3329 |  | 
|---|
| 3330 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 3331 | */ | 
|---|
| 3332 |  | 
|---|
| 3333 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3334 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListView::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3335 |  | 
|---|
| 3336 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3337 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3338 |  | 
|---|
| 3339 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Q3ListView} for this class). | 
|---|
| 3340 |  | 
|---|
| 3341 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 3342 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 3343 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 3344 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 3345 |  | 
|---|
| 3346 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3347 | */ | 
|---|
| 3348 |  | 
|---|
| 3349 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3350 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListView::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3351 |  | 
|---|
| 3352 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3353 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3354 |  | 
|---|
| 3355 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 3356 |  | 
|---|
| 3357 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 3358 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 3359 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 3360 |  | 
|---|
| 3361 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3362 | */ | 
|---|
| 3363 |  | 
|---|
| 3364 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3365 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::items | 
|---|
| 3366 | \brief a list of items in the Q3ListView | 
|---|
| 3367 |  | 
|---|
| 3368 | This is a list of \l {QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem}s. The first item | 
|---|
| 3369 | can be used for most of the calculation that are needed for | 
|---|
| 3370 | drawing a list view. Any additional items are the children of | 
|---|
| 3371 | this first item, which may be used for additional information. | 
|---|
| 3372 |  | 
|---|
| 3373 | \sa QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem | 
|---|
| 3374 | */ | 
|---|
| 3375 |  | 
|---|
| 3376 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3377 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::viewportPalette | 
|---|
| 3378 | \brief the palette of Q3ListView's viewport | 
|---|
| 3379 |  | 
|---|
| 3380 | By default, the application's default palette is used. | 
|---|
| 3381 | */ | 
|---|
| 3382 |  | 
|---|
| 3383 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3384 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::viewportBGRole | 
|---|
| 3385 | \brief the background role of Q3ListView's viewport | 
|---|
| 3386 |  | 
|---|
| 3387 | The default value is QPalette::Base. | 
|---|
| 3388 |  | 
|---|
| 3389 | \sa QWidget::backgroundRole() | 
|---|
| 3390 | */ | 
|---|
| 3391 |  | 
|---|
| 3392 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3393 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::sortColumn | 
|---|
| 3394 | \brief the sort column of the list view | 
|---|
| 3395 |  | 
|---|
| 3396 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 3397 |  | 
|---|
| 3398 | \sa Q3ListView::sortColumn() | 
|---|
| 3399 | */ | 
|---|
| 3400 |  | 
|---|
| 3401 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3402 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::itemMargin | 
|---|
| 3403 | \brief the margin for items in the list view | 
|---|
| 3404 |  | 
|---|
| 3405 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 3406 |  | 
|---|
| 3407 | \sa Q3ListView::itemMargin() | 
|---|
| 3408 | */ | 
|---|
| 3409 |  | 
|---|
| 3410 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3411 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::treeStepSize | 
|---|
| 3412 | \brief the number of pixel to offset children items from their | 
|---|
| 3413 | parents | 
|---|
| 3414 |  | 
|---|
| 3415 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 3416 |  | 
|---|
| 3417 | \sa Q3ListView::treeStepSize() | 
|---|
| 3418 | */ | 
|---|
| 3419 |  | 
|---|
| 3420 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3421 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::rootIsDecorated | 
|---|
| 3422 | \brief whether root items are decorated | 
|---|
| 3423 |  | 
|---|
| 3424 | The default value is false. | 
|---|
| 3425 |  | 
|---|
| 3426 | \sa Q3ListView::rootIsDecorated() | 
|---|
| 3427 | */ | 
|---|
| 3428 |  | 
|---|
| 3429 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3430 | \class QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow | 
|---|
| 3431 | \brief The QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 3432 | parameters for drawing various parts of a Q3DockWindow. | 
|---|
| 3433 |  | 
|---|
| 3434 | This class is used for drawing the old Q3DockWindow and its | 
|---|
| 3435 | parts. \bold {It is not recommended for new classes}. | 
|---|
| 3436 |  | 
|---|
| 3437 | QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 3438 | functions need to draw Q3DockWindow and its parts. | 
|---|
| 3439 |  | 
|---|
| 3440 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 3441 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 3442 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 3443 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 3444 |  | 
|---|
| 3445 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 3446 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 3447 |  | 
|---|
| 3448 | \sa QStyleOption,  Q3DockWindow | 
|---|
| 3449 | */ | 
|---|
| 3450 |  | 
|---|
| 3451 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3452 | Constructs a QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow, initializing the member | 
|---|
| 3453 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 3454 | */ | 
|---|
| 3455 |  | 
|---|
| 3456 | QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow() | 
|---|
| 3457 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_Q3DockWindow), docked(false), closeEnabled(false) | 
|---|
| 3458 | { | 
|---|
| 3459 | } | 
|---|
| 3460 |  | 
|---|
| 3461 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3462 | \internal | 
|---|
| 3463 | */ | 
|---|
| 3464 | QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow(int version) | 
|---|
| 3465 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Q3DockWindow), docked(false), closeEnabled(false) | 
|---|
| 3466 | { | 
|---|
| 3467 | } | 
|---|
| 3468 |  | 
|---|
| 3469 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3470 | \fn QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow(const QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow &other) | 
|---|
| 3471 |  | 
|---|
| 3472 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 3473 | */ | 
|---|
| 3474 |  | 
|---|
| 3475 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3476 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3477 |  | 
|---|
| 3478 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3479 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3480 |  | 
|---|
| 3481 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Q3DockWindow} for this class). | 
|---|
| 3482 |  | 
|---|
| 3483 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 3484 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 3485 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 3486 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 3487 |  | 
|---|
| 3488 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3489 | */ | 
|---|
| 3490 |  | 
|---|
| 3491 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3492 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3493 |  | 
|---|
| 3494 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3495 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3496 |  | 
|---|
| 3497 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 3498 |  | 
|---|
| 3499 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 3500 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 3501 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 3502 |  | 
|---|
| 3503 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3504 | */ | 
|---|
| 3505 |  | 
|---|
| 3506 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3507 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::docked | 
|---|
| 3508 | \brief whether the dock window is currently docked | 
|---|
| 3509 |  | 
|---|
| 3510 | The default value is false. | 
|---|
| 3511 | */ | 
|---|
| 3512 |  | 
|---|
| 3513 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3514 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::closeEnabled | 
|---|
| 3515 | \brief whether the dock window has a close button | 
|---|
| 3516 |  | 
|---|
| 3517 | The default value is false. | 
|---|
| 3518 | */ | 
|---|
| 3519 |  | 
|---|
| 3520 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3521 | \class QStyleOptionDockWidget | 
|---|
| 3522 | \brief The QStyleOptionDockWidget class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 3523 | parameters for drawing a dock widget. | 
|---|
| 3524 |  | 
|---|
| 3525 | QStyleOptionDockWidget contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 3526 | functions need to draw graphical elements like QDockWidget. | 
|---|
| 3527 |  | 
|---|
| 3528 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 3529 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 3530 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 3531 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 3532 |  | 
|---|
| 3533 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 3534 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 3535 |  | 
|---|
| 3536 | \sa QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 3537 | */ | 
|---|
| 3538 |  | 
|---|
| 3539 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3540 | Constructs a QStyleOptionDockWidget, initializing the member | 
|---|
| 3541 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 3542 | */ | 
|---|
| 3543 |  | 
|---|
| 3544 | QStyleOptionDockWidget::QStyleOptionDockWidget() | 
|---|
| 3545 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_DockWidget), closable(false), | 
|---|
| 3546 | movable(false), floatable(false) | 
|---|
| 3547 | { | 
|---|
| 3548 | } | 
|---|
| 3549 |  | 
|---|
| 3550 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3551 | \internal | 
|---|
| 3552 | */ | 
|---|
| 3553 | QStyleOptionDockWidget::QStyleOptionDockWidget(int version) | 
|---|
| 3554 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_DockWidget), closable(false), | 
|---|
| 3555 | movable(false), floatable(false) | 
|---|
| 3556 | { | 
|---|
| 3557 | } | 
|---|
| 3558 |  | 
|---|
| 3559 | QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2() | 
|---|
| 3560 | : QStyleOptionDockWidget(Version), verticalTitleBar(false) | 
|---|
| 3561 | { | 
|---|
| 3562 | } | 
|---|
| 3563 |  | 
|---|
| 3564 | QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2( | 
|---|
| 3565 | const QStyleOptionDockWidget &other) | 
|---|
| 3566 | : QStyleOptionDockWidget(Version) | 
|---|
| 3567 | { | 
|---|
| 3568 | (void)QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 3569 | } | 
|---|
| 3570 |  | 
|---|
| 3571 | QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2 &QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::operator = ( | 
|---|
| 3572 | const QStyleOptionDockWidget &other) | 
|---|
| 3573 | { | 
|---|
| 3574 | QStyleOptionDockWidget::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 3575 | const QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2 *v2 | 
|---|
| 3576 | = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2*>(&other); | 
|---|
| 3577 | verticalTitleBar = v2 ? v2->verticalTitleBar : false; | 
|---|
| 3578 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 3579 | } | 
|---|
| 3580 |  | 
|---|
| 3581 | QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2(int version) | 
|---|
| 3582 | : QStyleOptionDockWidget(version), verticalTitleBar(false) | 
|---|
| 3583 | { | 
|---|
| 3584 | } | 
|---|
| 3585 |  | 
|---|
| 3586 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3587 | \fn QStyleOptionDockWidget::QStyleOptionDockWidget(const QStyleOptionDockWidget &other) | 
|---|
| 3588 |  | 
|---|
| 3589 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 3590 | */ | 
|---|
| 3591 |  | 
|---|
| 3592 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3593 | \enum QStyleOptionDockWidget::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3594 |  | 
|---|
| 3595 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3596 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3597 |  | 
|---|
| 3598 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_DockWidget} for this class). | 
|---|
| 3599 |  | 
|---|
| 3600 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 3601 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 3602 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 3603 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 3604 |  | 
|---|
| 3605 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3606 | */ | 
|---|
| 3607 |  | 
|---|
| 3608 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3609 | \enum QStyleOptionDockWidget::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3610 |  | 
|---|
| 3611 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3612 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3613 |  | 
|---|
| 3614 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 3615 |  | 
|---|
| 3616 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 3617 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 3618 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 3619 |  | 
|---|
| 3620 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3621 | */ | 
|---|
| 3622 |  | 
|---|
| 3623 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3624 | \variable QStyleOptionDockWidget::title | 
|---|
| 3625 | \brief the title of the dock window | 
|---|
| 3626 |  | 
|---|
| 3627 | The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 3628 | */ | 
|---|
| 3629 |  | 
|---|
| 3630 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3631 | \variable QStyleOptionDockWidget::closable | 
|---|
| 3632 | \brief whether the dock window is closable | 
|---|
| 3633 |  | 
|---|
| 3634 | The default value is true. | 
|---|
| 3635 | */ | 
|---|
| 3636 |  | 
|---|
| 3637 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3638 | \variable QStyleOptionDockWidget::movable | 
|---|
| 3639 | \brief whether the dock window is movable | 
|---|
| 3640 |  | 
|---|
| 3641 | The default value is false. | 
|---|
| 3642 | */ | 
|---|
| 3643 |  | 
|---|
| 3644 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3645 | \variable QStyleOptionDockWidget::floatable | 
|---|
| 3646 | \brief whether the dock window is floatable | 
|---|
| 3647 |  | 
|---|
| 3648 | The default value is true. | 
|---|
| 3649 | */ | 
|---|
| 3650 |  | 
|---|
| 3651 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3652 | \class QStyleOptionToolButton | 
|---|
| 3653 | \brief The QStyleOptionToolButton class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 3654 | parameters for drawing a tool button. | 
|---|
| 3655 |  | 
|---|
| 3656 | QStyleOptionToolButton contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 3657 | functions need to draw QToolButton. | 
|---|
| 3658 |  | 
|---|
| 3659 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 3660 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 3661 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 3662 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 3663 |  | 
|---|
| 3664 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 3665 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 3666 |  | 
|---|
| 3667 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QStyleOptionButton | 
|---|
| 3668 | */ | 
|---|
| 3669 |  | 
|---|
| 3670 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3671 | \enum QStyleOptionToolButton::ToolButtonFeature | 
|---|
| 3672 | Describes the various features that a tool button can have. | 
|---|
| 3673 |  | 
|---|
| 3674 | \value None A normal tool button. | 
|---|
| 3675 | \value Arrow The tool button is an arrow. | 
|---|
| 3676 | \value Menu The tool button has a menu. | 
|---|
| 3677 | \value PopupDelay There is a delay to showing the menu. | 
|---|
| 3678 | \value HasMenu The button has a popup menu. | 
|---|
| 3679 | \value MenuButtonPopup The button should display an arrow to | 
|---|
| 3680 | indicate that a menu is present. | 
|---|
| 3681 |  | 
|---|
| 3682 | \sa features, QToolButton::toolButtonStyle(), QToolButton::popupMode() | 
|---|
| 3683 | */ | 
|---|
| 3684 |  | 
|---|
| 3685 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3686 | Constructs a QStyleOptionToolButton, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 3687 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 3688 | */ | 
|---|
| 3689 |  | 
|---|
| 3690 | QStyleOptionToolButton::QStyleOptionToolButton() | 
|---|
| 3691 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_ToolButton), features(None), arrowType(Qt::DownArrow) | 
|---|
| 3692 | , toolButtonStyle(Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly) | 
|---|
| 3693 | { | 
|---|
| 3694 | } | 
|---|
| 3695 |  | 
|---|
| 3696 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3697 | \internal | 
|---|
| 3698 | */ | 
|---|
| 3699 | QStyleOptionToolButton::QStyleOptionToolButton(int version) | 
|---|
| 3700 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_ToolButton), features(None), arrowType(Qt::DownArrow) | 
|---|
| 3701 | , toolButtonStyle(Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly) | 
|---|
| 3702 |  | 
|---|
| 3703 | { | 
|---|
| 3704 | } | 
|---|
| 3705 |  | 
|---|
| 3706 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3707 | \fn QStyleOptionToolButton::QStyleOptionToolButton(const QStyleOptionToolButton &other) | 
|---|
| 3708 |  | 
|---|
| 3709 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 3710 | */ | 
|---|
| 3711 |  | 
|---|
| 3712 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3713 | \enum QStyleOptionToolButton::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3714 |  | 
|---|
| 3715 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3716 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3717 |  | 
|---|
| 3718 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ToolButton} for this class). | 
|---|
| 3719 |  | 
|---|
| 3720 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 3721 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 3722 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 3723 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 3724 |  | 
|---|
| 3725 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3726 | */ | 
|---|
| 3727 |  | 
|---|
| 3728 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3729 | \enum QStyleOptionToolButton::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3730 |  | 
|---|
| 3731 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3732 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3733 |  | 
|---|
| 3734 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 3735 |  | 
|---|
| 3736 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 3737 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 3738 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 3739 |  | 
|---|
| 3740 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3741 | */ | 
|---|
| 3742 |  | 
|---|
| 3743 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3744 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::features | 
|---|
| 3745 | \brief an OR combination of the tool button's features | 
|---|
| 3746 |  | 
|---|
| 3747 | The default value is \l None. | 
|---|
| 3748 |  | 
|---|
| 3749 | \sa ToolButtonFeature | 
|---|
| 3750 | */ | 
|---|
| 3751 |  | 
|---|
| 3752 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3753 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::icon | 
|---|
| 3754 | \brief the icon for the tool button | 
|---|
| 3755 |  | 
|---|
| 3756 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a | 
|---|
| 3757 | pixmap nor a filename. | 
|---|
| 3758 |  | 
|---|
| 3759 | \sa iconSize | 
|---|
| 3760 | */ | 
|---|
| 3761 |  | 
|---|
| 3762 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3763 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::iconSize | 
|---|
| 3764 | \brief the size of the icon for the tool button | 
|---|
| 3765 |  | 
|---|
| 3766 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size. | 
|---|
| 3767 | */ | 
|---|
| 3768 |  | 
|---|
| 3769 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3770 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::text | 
|---|
| 3771 | \brief the text of the tool button | 
|---|
| 3772 |  | 
|---|
| 3773 | This value is only used if toolButtonStyle is | 
|---|
| 3774 | Qt::ToolButtonTextUnderIcon, Qt::ToolButtonTextBesideIcon, or | 
|---|
| 3775 | Qt::ToolButtonTextOnly. The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 3776 | */ | 
|---|
| 3777 |  | 
|---|
| 3778 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3779 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::arrowType | 
|---|
| 3780 | \brief the direction of the arrow for the tool button | 
|---|
| 3781 |  | 
|---|
| 3782 | This value is only used if \l features includes \l Arrow. The | 
|---|
| 3783 | default value is Qt::DownArrow. | 
|---|
| 3784 | */ | 
|---|
| 3785 |  | 
|---|
| 3786 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3787 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::toolButtonStyle | 
|---|
| 3788 | \brief a Qt::ToolButtonStyle value describing the appearance of | 
|---|
| 3789 | the tool button | 
|---|
| 3790 |  | 
|---|
| 3791 | The default value is Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly. | 
|---|
| 3792 |  | 
|---|
| 3793 | \sa QToolButton::toolButtonStyle() | 
|---|
| 3794 | */ | 
|---|
| 3795 |  | 
|---|
| 3796 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3797 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::pos | 
|---|
| 3798 | \brief the position of the tool button | 
|---|
| 3799 |  | 
|---|
| 3800 | The default value is a null point, i.e. (0, 0) | 
|---|
| 3801 | */ | 
|---|
| 3802 |  | 
|---|
| 3803 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3804 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::font | 
|---|
| 3805 | \brief the font that is used for the text | 
|---|
| 3806 |  | 
|---|
| 3807 | This value is only used if toolButtonStyle is | 
|---|
| 3808 | Qt::ToolButtonTextUnderIcon, Qt::ToolButtonTextBesideIcon, or | 
|---|
| 3809 | Qt::ToolButtonTextOnly. By default, the application's default font | 
|---|
| 3810 | is used. | 
|---|
| 3811 | */ | 
|---|
| 3812 |  | 
|---|
| 3813 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3814 | \class QStyleOptionComboBox | 
|---|
| 3815 | \brief The QStyleOptionComboBox class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 3816 | parameter for drawing a combobox. | 
|---|
| 3817 |  | 
|---|
| 3818 | QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 3819 | functions need to draw QComboBox. | 
|---|
| 3820 |  | 
|---|
| 3821 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 3822 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 3823 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 3824 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 3825 |  | 
|---|
| 3826 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 3827 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 3828 |  | 
|---|
| 3829 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QComboBox | 
|---|
| 3830 | */ | 
|---|
| 3831 |  | 
|---|
| 3832 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3833 | Creates a QStyleOptionComboBox, initializing the members variables | 
|---|
| 3834 | to their default values. | 
|---|
| 3835 | */ | 
|---|
| 3836 |  | 
|---|
| 3837 | QStyleOptionComboBox::QStyleOptionComboBox() | 
|---|
| 3838 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_ComboBox), editable(false), frame(true) | 
|---|
| 3839 | { | 
|---|
| 3840 | } | 
|---|
| 3841 |  | 
|---|
| 3842 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3843 | \internal | 
|---|
| 3844 | */ | 
|---|
| 3845 | QStyleOptionComboBox::QStyleOptionComboBox(int version) | 
|---|
| 3846 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_ComboBox), editable(false), frame(true) | 
|---|
| 3847 | { | 
|---|
| 3848 | } | 
|---|
| 3849 |  | 
|---|
| 3850 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3851 | \fn QStyleOptionComboBox::QStyleOptionComboBox(const QStyleOptionComboBox &other) | 
|---|
| 3852 |  | 
|---|
| 3853 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 3854 | */ | 
|---|
| 3855 |  | 
|---|
| 3856 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3857 | \enum QStyleOptionComboBox::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3858 |  | 
|---|
| 3859 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3860 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3861 |  | 
|---|
| 3862 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ComboBox} for this class). | 
|---|
| 3863 |  | 
|---|
| 3864 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 3865 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 3866 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 3867 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 3868 |  | 
|---|
| 3869 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3870 | */ | 
|---|
| 3871 |  | 
|---|
| 3872 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3873 | \enum QStyleOptionComboBox::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3874 |  | 
|---|
| 3875 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3876 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3877 |  | 
|---|
| 3878 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 3879 |  | 
|---|
| 3880 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 3881 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 3882 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 3883 |  | 
|---|
| 3884 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3885 | */ | 
|---|
| 3886 |  | 
|---|
| 3887 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3888 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::editable | 
|---|
| 3889 | \brief whether or not the combobox is editable or not | 
|---|
| 3890 |  | 
|---|
| 3891 | the default | 
|---|
| 3892 | value is false | 
|---|
| 3893 |  | 
|---|
| 3894 | \sa QComboBox::isEditable() | 
|---|
| 3895 | */ | 
|---|
| 3896 |  | 
|---|
| 3897 |  | 
|---|
| 3898 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3899 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::frame | 
|---|
| 3900 | \brief whether the combo box has a frame | 
|---|
| 3901 |  | 
|---|
| 3902 | The default value is true. | 
|---|
| 3903 | */ | 
|---|
| 3904 |  | 
|---|
| 3905 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3906 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::currentText | 
|---|
| 3907 | \brief the text for the current item of the combo box | 
|---|
| 3908 |  | 
|---|
| 3909 | The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 3910 | */ | 
|---|
| 3911 |  | 
|---|
| 3912 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3913 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::currentIcon | 
|---|
| 3914 | \brief the icon for the current item of the combo box | 
|---|
| 3915 |  | 
|---|
| 3916 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a | 
|---|
| 3917 | pixmap nor a filename. | 
|---|
| 3918 | */ | 
|---|
| 3919 |  | 
|---|
| 3920 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3921 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::iconSize | 
|---|
| 3922 | \brief the icon size for the current item of the combo box | 
|---|
| 3923 |  | 
|---|
| 3924 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size. | 
|---|
| 3925 | */ | 
|---|
| 3926 |  | 
|---|
| 3927 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3928 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::popupRect | 
|---|
| 3929 | \brief the popup rectangle for the combobox | 
|---|
| 3930 |  | 
|---|
| 3931 | The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both | 
|---|
| 3932 | the width and the height set to 0. | 
|---|
| 3933 |  | 
|---|
| 3934 | This variable is currently unused. You can safely ignore it. | 
|---|
| 3935 |  | 
|---|
| 3936 | \sa QStyle::SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup | 
|---|
| 3937 | */ | 
|---|
| 3938 |  | 
|---|
| 3939 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3940 | \class QStyleOptionToolBox | 
|---|
| 3941 | \brief The QStyleOptionToolBox class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 3942 | parameters needed for drawing a tool box. | 
|---|
| 3943 |  | 
|---|
| 3944 | QStyleOptionToolBox contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 3945 | functions need to draw QToolBox. | 
|---|
| 3946 |  | 
|---|
| 3947 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 3948 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 3949 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 3950 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 3951 |  | 
|---|
| 3952 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 3953 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 3954 |  | 
|---|
| 3955 | \sa QStyleOption, QToolBox | 
|---|
| 3956 | */ | 
|---|
| 3957 |  | 
|---|
| 3958 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3959 | Creates a QStyleOptionToolBox, initializing the members variables | 
|---|
| 3960 | to their default values. | 
|---|
| 3961 | */ | 
|---|
| 3962 |  | 
|---|
| 3963 | QStyleOptionToolBox::QStyleOptionToolBox() | 
|---|
| 3964 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_ToolBox) | 
|---|
| 3965 | { | 
|---|
| 3966 | } | 
|---|
| 3967 |  | 
|---|
| 3968 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3969 | \internal | 
|---|
| 3970 | */ | 
|---|
| 3971 | QStyleOptionToolBox::QStyleOptionToolBox(int version) | 
|---|
| 3972 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_ToolBox) | 
|---|
| 3973 | { | 
|---|
| 3974 | } | 
|---|
| 3975 |  | 
|---|
| 3976 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3977 | \fn QStyleOptionToolBox::QStyleOptionToolBox(const QStyleOptionToolBox &other) | 
|---|
| 3978 |  | 
|---|
| 3979 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 3980 | */ | 
|---|
| 3981 |  | 
|---|
| 3982 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3983 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBox::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 3984 |  | 
|---|
| 3985 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 3986 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 3987 |  | 
|---|
| 3988 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ToolBox} for this class). | 
|---|
| 3989 |  | 
|---|
| 3990 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 3991 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 3992 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 3993 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 3994 |  | 
|---|
| 3995 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 3996 | */ | 
|---|
| 3997 |  | 
|---|
| 3998 | /*! | 
|---|
| 3999 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBox::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4000 |  | 
|---|
| 4001 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4002 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4003 |  | 
|---|
| 4004 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 4005 |  | 
|---|
| 4006 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 4007 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 4008 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 4009 |  | 
|---|
| 4010 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4011 | */ | 
|---|
| 4012 |  | 
|---|
| 4013 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4014 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBox::icon | 
|---|
| 4015 | \brief the icon for the tool box tab | 
|---|
| 4016 |  | 
|---|
| 4017 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a | 
|---|
| 4018 | pixmap nor a filename. | 
|---|
| 4019 | */ | 
|---|
| 4020 |  | 
|---|
| 4021 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4022 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBox::text | 
|---|
| 4023 | \brief the text for the tool box tab | 
|---|
| 4024 |  | 
|---|
| 4025 | The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 4026 | */ | 
|---|
| 4027 |  | 
|---|
| 4028 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4029 | \class QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 | 
|---|
| 4030 | \brief The QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.3 or above. | 
|---|
| 4031 |  | 
|---|
| 4032 | \since 4.3 | 
|---|
| 4033 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 inherits QStyleOptionToolBox which is used for | 
|---|
| 4034 | drawing the tabs in a QToolBox. | 
|---|
| 4035 |  | 
|---|
| 4036 | An instance of the QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 class has | 
|---|
| 4037 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_ToolBox and | 
|---|
| 4038 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2.  The type is used | 
|---|
| 4039 | internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 4040 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 4041 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 4042 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The | 
|---|
| 4043 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions | 
|---|
| 4044 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), | 
|---|
| 4045 | you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 4046 |  | 
|---|
| 4047 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both | 
|---|
| 4048 | QStyleOptionToolBox and QStyleOptionToolBoxV2. | 
|---|
| 4049 |  | 
|---|
| 4050 | \sa QStyleOptionToolBox, QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 4051 | */ | 
|---|
| 4052 |  | 
|---|
| 4053 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4054 | Contsructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 object. | 
|---|
| 4055 | */ | 
|---|
| 4056 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::QStyleOptionToolBoxV2() | 
|---|
| 4057 | : QStyleOptionToolBox(Version), position(Beginning), selectedPosition(NotAdjacent) | 
|---|
| 4058 | { | 
|---|
| 4059 | } | 
|---|
| 4060 |  | 
|---|
| 4061 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4062 | \fn QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::QStyleOptionToolBoxV2(const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 &other) | 
|---|
| 4063 |  | 
|---|
| 4064 | Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 4065 | */ | 
|---|
| 4066 |  | 
|---|
| 4067 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4068 | \internal | 
|---|
| 4069 | */ | 
|---|
| 4070 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::QStyleOptionToolBoxV2(int version) | 
|---|
| 4071 | : QStyleOptionToolBox(version), position(Beginning), selectedPosition(NotAdjacent) | 
|---|
| 4072 | { | 
|---|
| 4073 | } | 
|---|
| 4074 |  | 
|---|
| 4075 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4076 | Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 copy of the \a other style option | 
|---|
| 4077 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 or | 
|---|
| 4078 | QStyleOptionToolBox types. | 
|---|
| 4079 |  | 
|---|
| 4080 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style | 
|---|
| 4081 | option's \l{QStyleOptionTab::position} {position} value is set to | 
|---|
| 4082 | \l QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::Beginning and \l selectedPosition is set | 
|---|
| 4083 | to \l QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::NotAdjacent. If its version is 2, the | 
|---|
| 4084 | \l{QStyleOptionTab::position} {position} selectedPosition values | 
|---|
| 4085 | are simply copied to the new style option. | 
|---|
| 4086 |  | 
|---|
| 4087 | \sa version | 
|---|
| 4088 | */ | 
|---|
| 4089 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::QStyleOptionToolBoxV2(const QStyleOptionToolBox &other) | 
|---|
| 4090 | { | 
|---|
| 4091 | QStyleOptionToolBox::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 4092 |  | 
|---|
| 4093 | const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 *f2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 *>(&other); | 
|---|
| 4094 | position = f2 ? f2->position : Beginning; | 
|---|
| 4095 | selectedPosition = f2 ? f2->selectedPosition : NotAdjacent; | 
|---|
| 4096 | version = Version; | 
|---|
| 4097 | } | 
|---|
| 4098 |  | 
|---|
| 4099 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4100 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a | 
|---|
| 4101 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 or | 
|---|
| 4102 | QStyleOptionToolBox types. | 
|---|
| 4103 |  | 
|---|
| 4104 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, this style option's | 
|---|
| 4105 | \l{QStyleOptionTab::position} {position} and \l selectedPosition | 
|---|
| 4106 | values are set to \l QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::Beginning and \l | 
|---|
| 4107 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::NotAdjacent respectively. If its | 
|---|
| 4108 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} is 2, these values are simply | 
|---|
| 4109 | copied to this style option. | 
|---|
| 4110 | */ | 
|---|
| 4111 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 &QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionToolBox &other) | 
|---|
| 4112 | { | 
|---|
| 4113 | QStyleOptionToolBox::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 4114 |  | 
|---|
| 4115 | const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 *f2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 *>(&other); | 
|---|
| 4116 | position = f2 ? f2->position : Beginning; | 
|---|
| 4117 | selectedPosition = f2 ? f2->selectedPosition : NotAdjacent; | 
|---|
| 4118 | version = Version; | 
|---|
| 4119 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 4120 | } | 
|---|
| 4121 |  | 
|---|
| 4122 |  | 
|---|
| 4123 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4124 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::SelectedPosition | 
|---|
| 4125 |  | 
|---|
| 4126 | This enum describes the position of the selected tab. Some styles | 
|---|
| 4127 | need to draw a tab differently depending on whether or not it is | 
|---|
| 4128 | adjacent to the selected tab. | 
|---|
| 4129 |  | 
|---|
| 4130 | \value NotAdjacent The tab is not adjacent to a selected tab (or is the selected tab). | 
|---|
| 4131 | \value NextIsSelected The next tab (typically the tab on the right) is selected. | 
|---|
| 4132 | \value PreviousIsSelected The previous tab (typically the tab on the left) is selected. | 
|---|
| 4133 |  | 
|---|
| 4134 | \sa selectedPosition | 
|---|
| 4135 | */ | 
|---|
| 4136 |  | 
|---|
| 4137 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4138 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4139 |  | 
|---|
| 4140 | This enum holds the version of this style option | 
|---|
| 4141 |  | 
|---|
| 4142 | \value Version 2 | 
|---|
| 4143 | */ | 
|---|
| 4144 |  | 
|---|
| 4145 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4146 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::TabPosition | 
|---|
| 4147 |  | 
|---|
| 4148 | This enum describes tab positions relative to other tabs. | 
|---|
| 4149 |  | 
|---|
| 4150 | \value Beginning The tab is the first (i.e., top-most) tab in | 
|---|
| 4151 | the toolbox. | 
|---|
| 4152 | \value Middle The tab is placed in the middle of the toolbox. | 
|---|
| 4153 | \value End The tab is placed at the bottom of the toolbox. | 
|---|
| 4154 | \value OnlyOneTab There is only one tab in the toolbox. | 
|---|
| 4155 | */ | 
|---|
| 4156 |  | 
|---|
| 4157 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4158 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::selectedPosition | 
|---|
| 4159 | \brief the position of the selected tab in relation to this tab | 
|---|
| 4160 |  | 
|---|
| 4161 | The default value is NotAdjacent, i.e. the tab is not adjacent to | 
|---|
| 4162 | a selected tab nor is it the selected tab. | 
|---|
| 4163 | */ | 
|---|
| 4164 |  | 
|---|
| 4165 | #ifndef QT_NO_RUBBERBAND | 
|---|
| 4166 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4167 | \class QStyleOptionRubberBand | 
|---|
| 4168 | \brief The QStyleOptionRubberBand class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 4169 | parameters needed for drawing a rubber band. | 
|---|
| 4170 |  | 
|---|
| 4171 | QStyleOptionRubberBand contains all the information that | 
|---|
| 4172 | QStyle functions need to draw QRubberBand. | 
|---|
| 4173 |  | 
|---|
| 4174 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 4175 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 4176 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 4177 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 4178 |  | 
|---|
| 4179 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 4180 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 4181 |  | 
|---|
| 4182 | \sa QStyleOption, QRubberBand | 
|---|
| 4183 | */ | 
|---|
| 4184 |  | 
|---|
| 4185 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4186 | Creates a QStyleOptionRubberBand, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 4187 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 4188 | */ | 
|---|
| 4189 |  | 
|---|
| 4190 | QStyleOptionRubberBand::QStyleOptionRubberBand() | 
|---|
| 4191 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_RubberBand), shape(QRubberBand::Line), opaque(false) | 
|---|
| 4192 | { | 
|---|
| 4193 | } | 
|---|
| 4194 |  | 
|---|
| 4195 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4196 | \internal | 
|---|
| 4197 | */ | 
|---|
| 4198 | QStyleOptionRubberBand::QStyleOptionRubberBand(int version) | 
|---|
| 4199 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_RubberBand), shape(QRubberBand::Line), opaque(false) | 
|---|
| 4200 | { | 
|---|
| 4201 | } | 
|---|
| 4202 |  | 
|---|
| 4203 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4204 | \fn QStyleOptionRubberBand::QStyleOptionRubberBand(const QStyleOptionRubberBand &other) | 
|---|
| 4205 |  | 
|---|
| 4206 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 4207 | */ | 
|---|
| 4208 |  | 
|---|
| 4209 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4210 | \enum QStyleOptionRubberBand::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4211 |  | 
|---|
| 4212 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4213 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4214 |  | 
|---|
| 4215 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_RubberBand} for this class). | 
|---|
| 4216 |  | 
|---|
| 4217 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 4218 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 4219 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 4220 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 4221 |  | 
|---|
| 4222 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4223 | */ | 
|---|
| 4224 |  | 
|---|
| 4225 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4226 | \enum QStyleOptionRubberBand::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4227 |  | 
|---|
| 4228 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4229 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4230 |  | 
|---|
| 4231 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 4232 |  | 
|---|
| 4233 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 4234 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 4235 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 4236 |  | 
|---|
| 4237 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4238 | */ | 
|---|
| 4239 |  | 
|---|
| 4240 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4241 | \variable QStyleOptionRubberBand::shape | 
|---|
| 4242 | \brief the shape of the rubber band | 
|---|
| 4243 |  | 
|---|
| 4244 | The default shape is QRubberBand::Line. | 
|---|
| 4245 | */ | 
|---|
| 4246 |  | 
|---|
| 4247 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4248 | \variable QStyleOptionRubberBand::opaque | 
|---|
| 4249 | \brief whether the rubber band is required to be drawn in an opaque style | 
|---|
| 4250 |  | 
|---|
| 4251 | The default value is true. | 
|---|
| 4252 | */ | 
|---|
| 4253 | #endif // QT_NO_RUBBERBAND | 
|---|
| 4254 |  | 
|---|
| 4255 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4256 | \class QStyleOptionTitleBar | 
|---|
| 4257 | \brief The QStyleOptionTitleBar class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 4258 | parameters for drawing a title bar. | 
|---|
| 4259 |  | 
|---|
| 4260 | QStyleOptionTitleBar contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 4261 | functions need to draw the title bar of a QMdiSubWindow. | 
|---|
| 4262 |  | 
|---|
| 4263 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 4264 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 4265 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 4266 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 4267 |  | 
|---|
| 4268 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 4269 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 4270 |  | 
|---|
| 4271 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QMdiSubWindow | 
|---|
| 4272 | */ | 
|---|
| 4273 |  | 
|---|
| 4274 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4275 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTitleBar, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 4276 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 4277 | */ | 
|---|
| 4278 |  | 
|---|
| 4279 | QStyleOptionTitleBar::QStyleOptionTitleBar() | 
|---|
| 4280 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_TitleBar), titleBarState(0), titleBarFlags(0) | 
|---|
| 4281 | { | 
|---|
| 4282 | } | 
|---|
| 4283 |  | 
|---|
| 4284 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4285 | \fn QStyleOptionTitleBar::QStyleOptionTitleBar(const QStyleOptionTitleBar &other) | 
|---|
| 4286 |  | 
|---|
| 4287 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 4288 | */ | 
|---|
| 4289 |  | 
|---|
| 4290 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4291 | \enum QStyleOptionTitleBar::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4292 |  | 
|---|
| 4293 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4294 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4295 |  | 
|---|
| 4296 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_TitleBar} for this class). | 
|---|
| 4297 |  | 
|---|
| 4298 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 4299 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 4300 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 4301 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 4302 |  | 
|---|
| 4303 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4304 | */ | 
|---|
| 4305 |  | 
|---|
| 4306 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4307 | \enum QStyleOptionTitleBar::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4308 |  | 
|---|
| 4309 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4310 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4311 |  | 
|---|
| 4312 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 4313 |  | 
|---|
| 4314 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 4315 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 4316 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 4317 |  | 
|---|
| 4318 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4319 | */ | 
|---|
| 4320 |  | 
|---|
| 4321 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4322 | \internal | 
|---|
| 4323 | */ | 
|---|
| 4324 | QStyleOptionTitleBar::QStyleOptionTitleBar(int version) | 
|---|
| 4325 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_TitleBar), titleBarState(0), titleBarFlags(0) | 
|---|
| 4326 | { | 
|---|
| 4327 | } | 
|---|
| 4328 |  | 
|---|
| 4329 |  | 
|---|
| 4330 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4331 | \variable QStyleOptionTitleBar::text | 
|---|
| 4332 | \brief the text of the title bar | 
|---|
| 4333 |  | 
|---|
| 4334 | The default value is an empty string. | 
|---|
| 4335 | */ | 
|---|
| 4336 |  | 
|---|
| 4337 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4338 | \variable QStyleOptionTitleBar::icon | 
|---|
| 4339 | \brief the icon for the title bar | 
|---|
| 4340 |  | 
|---|
| 4341 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a | 
|---|
| 4342 | pixmap nor a filename. | 
|---|
| 4343 | */ | 
|---|
| 4344 |  | 
|---|
| 4345 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4346 | \variable QStyleOptionTitleBar::titleBarState | 
|---|
| 4347 | \brief the state of the title bar | 
|---|
| 4348 |  | 
|---|
| 4349 | This is basically the window state of the underlying widget. The | 
|---|
| 4350 | default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 4351 |  | 
|---|
| 4352 | \sa QWidget::windowState() | 
|---|
| 4353 | */ | 
|---|
| 4354 |  | 
|---|
| 4355 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4356 | \variable QStyleOptionTitleBar::titleBarFlags | 
|---|
| 4357 | \brief the widget flags for the title bar | 
|---|
| 4358 |  | 
|---|
| 4359 | The default value is Qt::Widget. | 
|---|
| 4360 |  | 
|---|
| 4361 | \sa Qt::WindowFlags | 
|---|
| 4362 | */ | 
|---|
| 4363 |  | 
|---|
| 4364 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4365 | \class QStyleOptionViewItem | 
|---|
| 4366 | \brief The QStyleOptionViewItem class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 4367 | parameters used to draw an item in a view widget. | 
|---|
| 4368 |  | 
|---|
| 4369 | QStyleOptionViewItem contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 4370 | functions need to draw the items for Qt's model/view classes. | 
|---|
| 4371 |  | 
|---|
| 4372 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 4373 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 4374 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 4375 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 4376 |  | 
|---|
| 4377 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 4378 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 4379 |  | 
|---|
| 4380 | \sa QStyleOption, {model-view-programming.html}{Model/View | 
|---|
| 4381 | Programming} | 
|---|
| 4382 | */ | 
|---|
| 4383 |  | 
|---|
| 4384 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4385 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItem::Position | 
|---|
| 4386 |  | 
|---|
| 4387 | This enum describes the position of the item's decoration. | 
|---|
| 4388 |  | 
|---|
| 4389 | \value Left On the left of the text. | 
|---|
| 4390 | \value Right On the right of the text. | 
|---|
| 4391 | \value Top Above the text. | 
|---|
| 4392 | \value Bottom Below the text. | 
|---|
| 4393 |  | 
|---|
| 4394 | \sa decorationPosition | 
|---|
| 4395 | */ | 
|---|
| 4396 |  | 
|---|
| 4397 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4398 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::showDecorationSelected | 
|---|
| 4399 | \brief whether the decoration should be highlighted on selected | 
|---|
| 4400 | items | 
|---|
| 4401 |  | 
|---|
| 4402 | If this option is true, the branch and any decorations on selected items | 
|---|
| 4403 | should be highlighted, indicating that the item is selected; otherwise, no | 
|---|
| 4404 | highlighting is required. The default value is false. | 
|---|
| 4405 |  | 
|---|
| 4406 | \sa QStyle::SH_ItemView_ShowDecorationSelected, QAbstractItemView | 
|---|
| 4407 | */ | 
|---|
| 4408 |  | 
|---|
| 4409 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4410 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::textElideMode | 
|---|
| 4411 | \brief where ellipsis should be added for text that is too long to fit | 
|---|
| 4412 | into an item | 
|---|
| 4413 |  | 
|---|
| 4414 | The default value is Qt::ElideMiddle, i.e. the ellipsis appears in | 
|---|
| 4415 | the middle of the text. | 
|---|
| 4416 |  | 
|---|
| 4417 | \sa Qt::TextElideMode, QStyle::SH_ItemView_EllipsisLocation | 
|---|
| 4418 | */ | 
|---|
| 4419 |  | 
|---|
| 4420 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4421 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItem, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 4422 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 4423 | */ | 
|---|
| 4424 |  | 
|---|
| 4425 | QStyleOptionViewItem::QStyleOptionViewItem() | 
|---|
| 4426 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_ViewItem), | 
|---|
| 4427 | displayAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), decorationAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), | 
|---|
| 4428 | textElideMode(Qt::ElideMiddle), decorationPosition(Left), | 
|---|
| 4429 | showDecorationSelected(false) | 
|---|
| 4430 | { | 
|---|
| 4431 | } | 
|---|
| 4432 |  | 
|---|
| 4433 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4434 | \internal | 
|---|
| 4435 | */ | 
|---|
| 4436 | QStyleOptionViewItem::QStyleOptionViewItem(int version) | 
|---|
| 4437 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_ViewItem), | 
|---|
| 4438 | displayAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), decorationAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), | 
|---|
| 4439 | textElideMode(Qt::ElideMiddle), decorationPosition(Left), | 
|---|
| 4440 | showDecorationSelected(false) | 
|---|
| 4441 | { | 
|---|
| 4442 | } | 
|---|
| 4443 |  | 
|---|
| 4444 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4445 | \fn QStyleOptionViewItem::QStyleOptionViewItem(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other) | 
|---|
| 4446 |  | 
|---|
| 4447 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 4448 | */ | 
|---|
| 4449 |  | 
|---|
| 4450 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4451 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItem::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4452 |  | 
|---|
| 4453 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4454 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4455 |  | 
|---|
| 4456 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ViewItem} for this class). | 
|---|
| 4457 |  | 
|---|
| 4458 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 4459 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 4460 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 4461 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 4462 |  | 
|---|
| 4463 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4464 | */ | 
|---|
| 4465 |  | 
|---|
| 4466 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4467 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItem::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4468 |  | 
|---|
| 4469 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4470 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4471 |  | 
|---|
| 4472 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 4473 |  | 
|---|
| 4474 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 4475 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 4476 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 4477 |  | 
|---|
| 4478 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4479 | */ | 
|---|
| 4480 |  | 
|---|
| 4481 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4482 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::displayAlignment | 
|---|
| 4483 | \brief the alignment of the display value for the item | 
|---|
| 4484 |  | 
|---|
| 4485 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft. | 
|---|
| 4486 | */ | 
|---|
| 4487 |  | 
|---|
| 4488 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4489 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::decorationAlignment | 
|---|
| 4490 | \brief the alignment of the decoration for the item | 
|---|
| 4491 |  | 
|---|
| 4492 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft. | 
|---|
| 4493 | */ | 
|---|
| 4494 |  | 
|---|
| 4495 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4496 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::decorationPosition | 
|---|
| 4497 | \brief the position of the decoration for the item | 
|---|
| 4498 |  | 
|---|
| 4499 | The default value is \l Left. | 
|---|
| 4500 |  | 
|---|
| 4501 | \sa Position | 
|---|
| 4502 | */ | 
|---|
| 4503 |  | 
|---|
| 4504 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4505 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::decorationSize | 
|---|
| 4506 | \brief the size of the decoration for the item | 
|---|
| 4507 |  | 
|---|
| 4508 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size. | 
|---|
| 4509 |  | 
|---|
| 4510 | \sa decorationAlignment, decorationPosition | 
|---|
| 4511 | */ | 
|---|
| 4512 |  | 
|---|
| 4513 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4514 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::font | 
|---|
| 4515 | \brief the font used for the item | 
|---|
| 4516 |  | 
|---|
| 4517 | By default, the application's default font is used. | 
|---|
| 4518 |  | 
|---|
| 4519 | \sa QFont | 
|---|
| 4520 | */ | 
|---|
| 4521 |  | 
|---|
| 4522 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4523 | \fn T qstyleoption_cast<T>(const QStyleOption *option) | 
|---|
| 4524 | \relates QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 4525 |  | 
|---|
| 4526 | Returns a T or 0 depending on the \l{QStyleOption::type}{type} and | 
|---|
| 4527 | \l{QStyleOption::version}{version} of the given \a option. | 
|---|
| 4528 |  | 
|---|
| 4529 | Example: | 
|---|
| 4530 |  | 
|---|
| 4531 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 4 | 
|---|
| 4532 |  | 
|---|
| 4533 | \sa QStyleOption::type, QStyleOption::version | 
|---|
| 4534 | */ | 
|---|
| 4535 |  | 
|---|
| 4536 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4537 | \fn T qstyleoption_cast<T>(QStyleOption *option) | 
|---|
| 4538 | \overload | 
|---|
| 4539 | \relates QStyleOption | 
|---|
| 4540 |  | 
|---|
| 4541 | Returns a T or 0 depending on the type of the given \a option. | 
|---|
| 4542 | */ | 
|---|
| 4543 |  | 
|---|
| 4544 | #ifndef QT_NO_TABWIDGET | 
|---|
| 4545 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4546 | \class QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame | 
|---|
| 4547 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 4548 | parameters for drawing the frame around a tab widget. | 
|---|
| 4549 |  | 
|---|
| 4550 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame contains all the information that | 
|---|
| 4551 | QStyle functions need to draw the frame around QTabWidget. | 
|---|
| 4552 |  | 
|---|
| 4553 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 4554 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 4555 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 4556 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 4557 |  | 
|---|
| 4558 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 4559 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 4560 |  | 
|---|
| 4561 | \sa QStyleOption, QTabWidget | 
|---|
| 4562 | */ | 
|---|
| 4563 |  | 
|---|
| 4564 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4565 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 4566 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 4567 | */ | 
|---|
| 4568 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame() | 
|---|
| 4569 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_TabWidgetFrame), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0), | 
|---|
| 4570 | shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth) | 
|---|
| 4571 | { | 
|---|
| 4572 | } | 
|---|
| 4573 |  | 
|---|
| 4574 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4575 | \fn QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame(const QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame &other) | 
|---|
| 4576 |  | 
|---|
| 4577 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 4578 | */ | 
|---|
| 4579 |  | 
|---|
| 4580 | /*! \internal */ | 
|---|
| 4581 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame(int version) | 
|---|
| 4582 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_TabWidgetFrame), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0), | 
|---|
| 4583 | shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth) | 
|---|
| 4584 | { | 
|---|
| 4585 | } | 
|---|
| 4586 |  | 
|---|
| 4587 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4588 | \enum QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4589 |  | 
|---|
| 4590 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4591 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4592 |  | 
|---|
| 4593 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_TabWidgetFrame} for this class). | 
|---|
| 4594 |  | 
|---|
| 4595 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 4596 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 4597 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 4598 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 4599 |  | 
|---|
| 4600 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4601 | */ | 
|---|
| 4602 |  | 
|---|
| 4603 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4604 | \enum QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4605 |  | 
|---|
| 4606 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4607 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4608 |  | 
|---|
| 4609 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 4610 |  | 
|---|
| 4611 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 4612 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 4613 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 4614 |  | 
|---|
| 4615 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4616 | */ | 
|---|
| 4617 |  | 
|---|
| 4618 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4619 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::lineWidth | 
|---|
| 4620 | \brief the line width for drawing the panel | 
|---|
| 4621 |  | 
|---|
| 4622 | The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 4623 | */ | 
|---|
| 4624 |  | 
|---|
| 4625 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4626 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::midLineWidth | 
|---|
| 4627 | \brief the mid-line width for drawing the panel | 
|---|
| 4628 |  | 
|---|
| 4629 | The mid line width is usually used in drawing sunken or raised | 
|---|
| 4630 | frames. The default value is 0. | 
|---|
| 4631 | */ | 
|---|
| 4632 |  | 
|---|
| 4633 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4634 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::shape | 
|---|
| 4635 | \brief the tab shape used to draw the tabs | 
|---|
| 4636 |  | 
|---|
| 4637 | The default value is QTabBar::RoundedNorth. | 
|---|
| 4638 | */ | 
|---|
| 4639 |  | 
|---|
| 4640 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4641 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::tabBarSize | 
|---|
| 4642 | \brief the size of the tab bar | 
|---|
| 4643 |  | 
|---|
| 4644 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size. | 
|---|
| 4645 | */ | 
|---|
| 4646 |  | 
|---|
| 4647 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4648 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::rightCornerWidgetSize | 
|---|
| 4649 | \brief the size of the right-corner widget | 
|---|
| 4650 |  | 
|---|
| 4651 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size. | 
|---|
| 4652 | */ | 
|---|
| 4653 |  | 
|---|
| 4654 | /*! \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::leftCornerWidgetSize | 
|---|
| 4655 | \brief the size of the left-corner widget | 
|---|
| 4656 |  | 
|---|
| 4657 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size. | 
|---|
| 4658 | */ | 
|---|
| 4659 |  | 
|---|
| 4660 |  | 
|---|
| 4661 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4662 |  | 
|---|
| 4663 | \class QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 | 
|---|
| 4664 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 4665 | parameters for drawing the frame around a tab widget. | 
|---|
| 4666 |  | 
|---|
| 4667 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 contains all the information that | 
|---|
| 4668 | QStyle functions need to draw the frame around QTabWidget. | 
|---|
| 4669 |  | 
|---|
| 4670 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 4671 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 4672 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 4673 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 4674 |  | 
|---|
| 4675 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 4676 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 4677 |  | 
|---|
| 4678 | \sa QStyleOption, QTabWidget | 
|---|
| 4679 | */ | 
|---|
| 4680 |  | 
|---|
| 4681 |  | 
|---|
| 4682 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4683 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2::tabBarRect | 
|---|
| 4684 | \brief the rectangle containing all the tabs | 
|---|
| 4685 |  | 
|---|
| 4686 | The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both | 
|---|
| 4687 | the width and the height set to 0. | 
|---|
| 4688 | */ | 
|---|
| 4689 |  | 
|---|
| 4690 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4691 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2::selectedTabRect | 
|---|
| 4692 | \brief the rectangle containing the selected tab | 
|---|
| 4693 |  | 
|---|
| 4694 | This rectangle is contained within the tabBarRect. The default | 
|---|
| 4695 | value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width | 
|---|
| 4696 | and the height set to 0. | 
|---|
| 4697 | */ | 
|---|
| 4698 |  | 
|---|
| 4699 |  | 
|---|
| 4700 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4701 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 4702 | variables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 4703 | */ | 
|---|
| 4704 |  | 
|---|
| 4705 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2() | 
|---|
| 4706 | : QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame(Version) | 
|---|
| 4707 | { | 
|---|
| 4708 | } | 
|---|
| 4709 |  | 
|---|
| 4710 |  | 
|---|
| 4711 | /*! \internal */ | 
|---|
| 4712 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2(int version) | 
|---|
| 4713 | : QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame(version) | 
|---|
| 4714 | { | 
|---|
| 4715 | } | 
|---|
| 4716 |  | 
|---|
| 4717 |  | 
|---|
| 4718 | /*! \fn QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2(const QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 &other) | 
|---|
| 4719 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 4720 |  | 
|---|
| 4721 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style option's \l | 
|---|
| 4722 | selectedTabRect and tabBarRect will contain null rects | 
|---|
| 4723 |  | 
|---|
| 4724 | \sa version | 
|---|
| 4725 | */ | 
|---|
| 4726 |  | 
|---|
| 4727 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4728 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 4729 |  | 
|---|
| 4730 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style option's \l | 
|---|
| 4731 | selectedTabRect and tabBarRect will contain null rects | 
|---|
| 4732 |  | 
|---|
| 4733 | \sa version | 
|---|
| 4734 | */ | 
|---|
| 4735 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2(const QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame &other) | 
|---|
| 4736 | { | 
|---|
| 4737 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 4738 |  | 
|---|
| 4739 | } | 
|---|
| 4740 |  | 
|---|
| 4741 |  | 
|---|
| 4742 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4743 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a | 
|---|
| 4744 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV2 or | 
|---|
| 4745 | QStyleOptionFrame types. | 
|---|
| 4746 |  | 
|---|
| 4747 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, this style option's | 
|---|
| 4748 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::FrameFeature value is set to | 
|---|
| 4749 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::None. If its version is 2, its | 
|---|
| 4750 | \l{QStyleOptionFrameV2::}{FrameFeature} value is simply copied to | 
|---|
| 4751 | this style option. | 
|---|
| 4752 | */ | 
|---|
| 4753 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 &QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame &other) | 
|---|
| 4754 | { | 
|---|
| 4755 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 4756 | if (const QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 *f2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2 *>(&other)) { | 
|---|
| 4757 | selectedTabRect = f2->selectedTabRect; | 
|---|
| 4758 | tabBarRect = f2->tabBarRect; | 
|---|
| 4759 | } | 
|---|
| 4760 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 4761 | } | 
|---|
| 4762 |  | 
|---|
| 4763 |  | 
|---|
| 4764 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4765 | \enum QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameV2::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4766 |  | 
|---|
| 4767 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4768 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4769 |  | 
|---|
| 4770 | \value Version 2 | 
|---|
| 4771 |  | 
|---|
| 4772 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 4773 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 4774 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 4775 |  | 
|---|
| 4776 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4777 | */ | 
|---|
| 4778 |  | 
|---|
| 4779 |  | 
|---|
| 4780 | #endif // QT_NO_TABWIDGET | 
|---|
| 4781 |  | 
|---|
| 4782 | #ifndef QT_NO_TABBAR | 
|---|
| 4783 |  | 
|---|
| 4784 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4785 | \class QStyleOptionTabBarBase | 
|---|
| 4786 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabBarBase class is used to describe | 
|---|
| 4787 | the base of a tab bar, i.e. the part that the tab bar usually | 
|---|
| 4788 | overlaps with. | 
|---|
| 4789 |  | 
|---|
| 4790 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase  contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 4791 | functions need to draw the tab bar base. Note that this is only | 
|---|
| 4792 | drawn for a standalone QTabBar (one that isn't part of a | 
|---|
| 4793 | QTabWidget). | 
|---|
| 4794 |  | 
|---|
| 4795 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 4796 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 4797 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 4798 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 4799 |  | 
|---|
| 4800 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 4801 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 4802 |  | 
|---|
| 4803 | \sa QStyleOption, QTabBar::drawBase() | 
|---|
| 4804 | */ | 
|---|
| 4805 |  | 
|---|
| 4806 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4807 | Construct a QStyleOptionTabBarBase, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 4808 | vaiables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 4809 | */ | 
|---|
| 4810 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase::QStyleOptionTabBarBase() | 
|---|
| 4811 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_TabBarBase), shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth) | 
|---|
| 4812 | { | 
|---|
| 4813 | } | 
|---|
| 4814 |  | 
|---|
| 4815 | /*! \internal */ | 
|---|
| 4816 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase::QStyleOptionTabBarBase(int version) | 
|---|
| 4817 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_TabBarBase), shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth) | 
|---|
| 4818 | { | 
|---|
| 4819 | } | 
|---|
| 4820 |  | 
|---|
| 4821 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4822 | \fn QStyleOptionTabBarBase::QStyleOptionTabBarBase(const QStyleOptionTabBarBase &other) | 
|---|
| 4823 |  | 
|---|
| 4824 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 4825 | */ | 
|---|
| 4826 |  | 
|---|
| 4827 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4828 | \enum QStyleOptionTabBarBase::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4829 |  | 
|---|
| 4830 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4831 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4832 |  | 
|---|
| 4833 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_TabBarBase} for this class). | 
|---|
| 4834 |  | 
|---|
| 4835 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 4836 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 4837 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 4838 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 4839 |  | 
|---|
| 4840 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4841 | */ | 
|---|
| 4842 |  | 
|---|
| 4843 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4844 | \enum QStyleOptionTabBarBase::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4845 |  | 
|---|
| 4846 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4847 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4848 |  | 
|---|
| 4849 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 4850 |  | 
|---|
| 4851 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 4852 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 4853 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 4854 |  | 
|---|
| 4855 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4856 | */ | 
|---|
| 4857 |  | 
|---|
| 4858 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4859 | \variable QStyleOptionTabBarBase::shape | 
|---|
| 4860 | \brief the shape of the tab bar | 
|---|
| 4861 |  | 
|---|
| 4862 | The default value is QTabBar::RoundedNorth. | 
|---|
| 4863 | */ | 
|---|
| 4864 |  | 
|---|
| 4865 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4866 | \variable QStyleOptionTabBarBase::tabBarRect | 
|---|
| 4867 | \brief the rectangle containing all the tabs | 
|---|
| 4868 |  | 
|---|
| 4869 | The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both | 
|---|
| 4870 | the width and the height set to 0. | 
|---|
| 4871 | */ | 
|---|
| 4872 |  | 
|---|
| 4873 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4874 | \variable QStyleOptionTabBarBase::selectedTabRect | 
|---|
| 4875 | \brief the rectangle containing the selected tab | 
|---|
| 4876 |  | 
|---|
| 4877 | This rectangle is contained within the tabBarRect. The default | 
|---|
| 4878 | value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width | 
|---|
| 4879 | and the height set to 0. | 
|---|
| 4880 | */ | 
|---|
| 4881 |  | 
|---|
| 4882 |  | 
|---|
| 4883 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4884 | \class QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 | 
|---|
| 4885 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 class is used to describe | 
|---|
| 4886 | the base of a tab bar, i.e. the part that the tab bar usually | 
|---|
| 4887 | overlaps with. | 
|---|
| 4888 | \since 4.5 | 
|---|
| 4889 |  | 
|---|
| 4890 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase  contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 4891 | functions need to draw the tab bar base. | 
|---|
| 4892 |  | 
|---|
| 4893 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 4894 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 4895 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 4896 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 4897 |  | 
|---|
| 4898 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 4899 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 4900 |  | 
|---|
| 4901 | \sa QStyleOption, QTabBar::drawBase() | 
|---|
| 4902 | */ | 
|---|
| 4903 |  | 
|---|
| 4904 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4905 | \enum QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 4906 |  | 
|---|
| 4907 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 4908 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 4909 |  | 
|---|
| 4910 | \value Version 2 | 
|---|
| 4911 |  | 
|---|
| 4912 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 4913 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 4914 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 4915 |  | 
|---|
| 4916 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 4917 | */ | 
|---|
| 4918 |  | 
|---|
| 4919 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4920 | \variable QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::documentMode | 
|---|
| 4921 | \brief whether the tabbar is in document mode. | 
|---|
| 4922 |  | 
|---|
| 4923 | The default value is false; | 
|---|
| 4924 | */ | 
|---|
| 4925 |  | 
|---|
| 4926 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4927 | Construct a QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2, initializing the members | 
|---|
| 4928 | vaiables to their default values. | 
|---|
| 4929 | */ | 
|---|
| 4930 | QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2() | 
|---|
| 4931 | : QStyleOptionTabBarBase(Version) | 
|---|
| 4932 | , documentMode(false) | 
|---|
| 4933 | { | 
|---|
| 4934 | } | 
|---|
| 4935 |  | 
|---|
| 4936 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4937 | \fn QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2(const QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 &other) | 
|---|
| 4938 |  | 
|---|
| 4939 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 4940 | */ | 
|---|
| 4941 |  | 
|---|
| 4942 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4943 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 4944 | */ | 
|---|
| 4945 | QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2(const QStyleOptionTabBarBase &other) | 
|---|
| 4946 | : QStyleOptionTabBarBase(Version) | 
|---|
| 4947 | { | 
|---|
| 4948 | (void)QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 4949 | } | 
|---|
| 4950 |  | 
|---|
| 4951 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4952 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 copy of the \a other style option | 
|---|
| 4953 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2, or QStyleOptionTabBarBase types. | 
|---|
| 4954 |  | 
|---|
| 4955 | If the other style option's version is not 1, the new style option's | 
|---|
| 4956 | \c documentMode is set to false.  If its version is 2, its \c documentMode value | 
|---|
| 4957 | is simply copied to the new style option. | 
|---|
| 4958 | */ | 
|---|
| 4959 | QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 &QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::operator = (const QStyleOptionTabBarBase &other) | 
|---|
| 4960 | { | 
|---|
| 4961 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase::operator=(other); | 
|---|
| 4962 | const QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 *v2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2*>(&other); | 
|---|
| 4963 | documentMode = v2 ? v2->documentMode : false; | 
|---|
| 4964 | return *this; | 
|---|
| 4965 | } | 
|---|
| 4966 |  | 
|---|
| 4967 | /*! \internal */ | 
|---|
| 4968 | QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2(int version) | 
|---|
| 4969 | : QStyleOptionTabBarBase(version), documentMode(false) | 
|---|
| 4970 | { | 
|---|
| 4971 | } | 
|---|
| 4972 |  | 
|---|
| 4973 | #endif // QT_NO_TABBAR | 
|---|
| 4974 |  | 
|---|
| 4975 | #ifndef QT_NO_SIZEGRIP | 
|---|
| 4976 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4977 | \class QStyleOptionSizeGrip | 
|---|
| 4978 | \brief The QStyleOptionSizeGrip class is used to describe the | 
|---|
| 4979 | parameter for drawing a size grip. | 
|---|
| 4980 | \since 4.2 | 
|---|
| 4981 |  | 
|---|
| 4982 | QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle | 
|---|
| 4983 | functions need to draw QSizeGrip. | 
|---|
| 4984 |  | 
|---|
| 4985 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 4986 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 4987 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 4988 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions. | 
|---|
| 4989 |  | 
|---|
| 4990 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 4991 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 4992 |  | 
|---|
| 4993 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QSizeGrip | 
|---|
| 4994 | */ | 
|---|
| 4995 |  | 
|---|
| 4996 | /*! | 
|---|
| 4997 | Constructs a QStyleOptionSizeGrip. | 
|---|
| 4998 | */ | 
|---|
| 4999 | QStyleOptionSizeGrip::QStyleOptionSizeGrip() | 
|---|
| 5000 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, Type), corner(Qt::BottomRightCorner) | 
|---|
| 5001 | { | 
|---|
| 5002 | } | 
|---|
| 5003 |  | 
|---|
| 5004 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5005 | \fn QStyleOptionSizeGrip::QStyleOptionSizeGrip(const QStyleOptionSizeGrip &other) | 
|---|
| 5006 |  | 
|---|
| 5007 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option. | 
|---|
| 5008 | */ | 
|---|
| 5009 |  | 
|---|
| 5010 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5011 | \internal | 
|---|
| 5012 | */ | 
|---|
| 5013 | QStyleOptionSizeGrip::QStyleOptionSizeGrip(int version) | 
|---|
| 5014 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, Type), corner(Qt::BottomRightCorner) | 
|---|
| 5015 | { | 
|---|
| 5016 | } | 
|---|
| 5017 |  | 
|---|
| 5018 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5019 | \variable QStyleOptionSizeGrip::corner | 
|---|
| 5020 |  | 
|---|
| 5021 | The corner in which the size grip is located. | 
|---|
| 5022 | */ | 
|---|
| 5023 |  | 
|---|
| 5024 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5025 | \enum QStyleOptionSizeGrip::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5026 |  | 
|---|
| 5027 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5028 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 5029 |  | 
|---|
| 5030 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_TabBarBase} for this class). | 
|---|
| 5031 |  | 
|---|
| 5032 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 5033 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 5034 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 5035 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 5036 |  | 
|---|
| 5037 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5038 | */ | 
|---|
| 5039 |  | 
|---|
| 5040 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5041 | \enum QStyleOptionSizeGrip::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5042 |  | 
|---|
| 5043 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5044 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 5045 |  | 
|---|
| 5046 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 5047 |  | 
|---|
| 5048 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 5049 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 5050 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 5051 |  | 
|---|
| 5052 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5053 | */ | 
|---|
| 5054 | #endif // QT_NO_SIZEGRIP | 
|---|
| 5055 |  | 
|---|
| 5056 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5057 | \class QStyleOptionGraphicsItem | 
|---|
| 5058 | \brief The QStyleOptionGraphicsItem class is used to describe | 
|---|
| 5059 | the parameters needed to draw a QGraphicsItem. | 
|---|
| 5060 | \since 4.2 | 
|---|
| 5061 | \ingroup graphicsview-api | 
|---|
| 5062 |  | 
|---|
| 5063 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is | 
|---|
| 5064 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel | 
|---|
| 5065 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that | 
|---|
| 5066 | these are simply parameters. | 
|---|
| 5067 |  | 
|---|
| 5068 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see | 
|---|
| 5069 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example. | 
|---|
| 5070 |  | 
|---|
| 5071 | \sa QStyleOption, QGraphicsItem::paint() | 
|---|
| 5072 | */ | 
|---|
| 5073 |  | 
|---|
| 5074 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5075 | \enum QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5076 |  | 
|---|
| 5077 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5078 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 5079 |  | 
|---|
| 5080 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l SO_GraphicsItem for this class). | 
|---|
| 5081 |  | 
|---|
| 5082 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 5083 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 5084 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 5085 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 5086 |  | 
|---|
| 5087 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5088 | */ | 
|---|
| 5089 |  | 
|---|
| 5090 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5091 | \enum QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5092 |  | 
|---|
| 5093 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5094 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass. | 
|---|
| 5095 |  | 
|---|
| 5096 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 5097 |  | 
|---|
| 5098 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 5099 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 5100 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 5101 |  | 
|---|
| 5102 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5103 | */ | 
|---|
| 5104 |  | 
|---|
| 5105 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5106 | Constructs a QStyleOptionGraphicsItem. | 
|---|
| 5107 | */ | 
|---|
| 5108 | QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::QStyleOptionGraphicsItem() | 
|---|
| 5109 | : QStyleOption(Version, Type), levelOfDetail(1) | 
|---|
| 5110 | { | 
|---|
| 5111 | } | 
|---|
| 5112 |  | 
|---|
| 5113 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5114 | \internal | 
|---|
| 5115 | */ | 
|---|
| 5116 | QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::QStyleOptionGraphicsItem(int version) | 
|---|
| 5117 | : QStyleOption(version, Type), levelOfDetail(1) | 
|---|
| 5118 | { | 
|---|
| 5119 | } | 
|---|
| 5120 |  | 
|---|
| 5121 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5122 | \since 4.6 | 
|---|
| 5123 |  | 
|---|
| 5124 | Returns the level of detail from the \a worldTransform. | 
|---|
| 5125 |  | 
|---|
| 5126 | Its value represents the maximum value of the height and | 
|---|
| 5127 | width of a unity rectangle, mapped using the \a worldTransform | 
|---|
| 5128 | of the painter used to draw the item. By default, if no | 
|---|
| 5129 | transformations are applied, its value is 1. If zoomed out 1:2, the level | 
|---|
| 5130 | of detail will be 0.5, and if zoomed in 2:1, its value is 2. | 
|---|
| 5131 | */ | 
|---|
| 5132 | qreal QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetailFromTransform(const QTransform &worldTransform) | 
|---|
| 5133 | { | 
|---|
| 5134 | if (worldTransform.type() <= QTransform::TxTranslate) | 
|---|
| 5135 | return 1; // Translation only? The LOD is 1. | 
|---|
| 5136 |  | 
|---|
| 5137 | // Two unit vectors. | 
|---|
| 5138 | QLineF v1(0, 0, 1, 0); | 
|---|
| 5139 | QLineF v2(0, 0, 0, 1); | 
|---|
| 5140 | // LOD is the transformed area of a 1x1 rectangle. | 
|---|
| 5141 | return qSqrt(worldTransform.map(v1).length() * worldTransform.map(v2).length()); | 
|---|
| 5142 | } | 
|---|
| 5143 |  | 
|---|
| 5144 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5145 | \fn QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::QStyleOptionGraphicsItem(const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem &other) | 
|---|
| 5146 |  | 
|---|
| 5147 | Constructs a copy of \a other. | 
|---|
| 5148 | */ | 
|---|
| 5149 |  | 
|---|
| 5150 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5151 | \variable QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::exposedRect | 
|---|
| 5152 | \brief the exposed rectangle, in item coordinates | 
|---|
| 5153 |  | 
|---|
| 5154 | Make use of this rectangle to speed up item drawing when only parts of the | 
|---|
| 5155 | item are exposed. If the whole item is exposed, this rectangle will be the | 
|---|
| 5156 | same as QGraphicsItem::boundingRect(). | 
|---|
| 5157 |  | 
|---|
| 5158 | This member is only initialized for items that have the | 
|---|
| 5159 | QGraphicsItem::ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption flag set. | 
|---|
| 5160 | */ | 
|---|
| 5161 |  | 
|---|
| 5162 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5163 | \variable QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::matrix | 
|---|
| 5164 | \brief the complete transformation matrix for the item | 
|---|
| 5165 | \obsolete | 
|---|
| 5166 |  | 
|---|
| 5167 | The QMatrix provided through this member does include information about | 
|---|
| 5168 | any perspective transformations applied to the view or item. To get the | 
|---|
| 5169 | correct transformation matrix, use QPainter::transform() on the painter | 
|---|
| 5170 | passed into the QGraphicsItem::paint() implementation. | 
|---|
| 5171 |  | 
|---|
| 5172 | This matrix is the combination of the item's scene matrix and the matrix | 
|---|
| 5173 | of the painter used for drawing the item. It is provided for convenience, | 
|---|
| 5174 | allowing anvanced level-of-detail metrics that can be used to speed up | 
|---|
| 5175 | item drawing. | 
|---|
| 5176 |  | 
|---|
| 5177 | To find the dimensions of an item in screen coordinates (i.e., pixels), | 
|---|
| 5178 | you can use the mapping functions of QMatrix, such as QMatrix::map(). | 
|---|
| 5179 |  | 
|---|
| 5180 | This member is only initialized for items that have the | 
|---|
| 5181 | QGraphicsItem::ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption flag set. | 
|---|
| 5182 |  | 
|---|
| 5183 | \sa QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetailFromTransform() | 
|---|
| 5184 | */ | 
|---|
| 5185 |  | 
|---|
| 5186 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5187 | \variable QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetail | 
|---|
| 5188 | \obsolete | 
|---|
| 5189 |  | 
|---|
| 5190 | Use QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetailFromTransform() | 
|---|
| 5191 | together with QPainter::worldTransform() instead. | 
|---|
| 5192 | */ | 
|---|
| 5193 |  | 
|---|
| 5194 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5195 | \class QStyleHintReturn | 
|---|
| 5196 | \brief The QStyleHintReturn class provides style hints that return more | 
|---|
| 5197 | than basic data types. | 
|---|
| 5198 |  | 
|---|
| 5199 | \ingroup appearance | 
|---|
| 5200 |  | 
|---|
| 5201 | QStyleHintReturn and its subclasses are used to pass information | 
|---|
| 5202 | from a style back to the querying widget. This is most useful | 
|---|
| 5203 | when the return value from QStyle::styleHint() does not provide enough | 
|---|
| 5204 | detail; for example, when a mask is to be returned. | 
|---|
| 5205 |  | 
|---|
| 5206 | \omit | 
|---|
| 5207 | ### --Sam | 
|---|
| 5208 | \endomit | 
|---|
| 5209 | */ | 
|---|
| 5210 |  | 
|---|
| 5211 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5212 | \enum QStyleHintReturn::HintReturnType | 
|---|
| 5213 |  | 
|---|
| 5214 | \value SH_Default QStyleHintReturn | 
|---|
| 5215 | \value SH_Mask \l QStyle::SH_RubberBand_Mask QStyle::SH_FocusFrame_Mask | 
|---|
| 5216 | \value SH_Variant \l QStyle::SH_TextControl_FocusIndicatorTextCharFormat | 
|---|
| 5217 | */ | 
|---|
| 5218 |  | 
|---|
| 5219 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5220 | \enum QStyleHintReturn::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5221 |  | 
|---|
| 5222 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5223 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass. | 
|---|
| 5224 |  | 
|---|
| 5225 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l SH_Default for | 
|---|
| 5226 | this class). | 
|---|
| 5227 |  | 
|---|
| 5228 | The type is used internally by QStyleHintReturn, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 5229 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 5230 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 5231 | create your own QStyleHintReturn subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 5232 |  | 
|---|
| 5233 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5234 | */ | 
|---|
| 5235 |  | 
|---|
| 5236 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5237 | \enum QStyleHintReturn::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5238 |  | 
|---|
| 5239 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5240 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass. | 
|---|
| 5241 |  | 
|---|
| 5242 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 5243 |  | 
|---|
| 5244 | The version is used by QStyleHintReturn subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 5245 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 5246 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 5247 |  | 
|---|
| 5248 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5249 | */ | 
|---|
| 5250 |  | 
|---|
| 5251 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5252 | \variable QStyleHintReturn::type | 
|---|
| 5253 | \brief the type of the style hint container | 
|---|
| 5254 |  | 
|---|
| 5255 | \sa HintReturnType | 
|---|
| 5256 | */ | 
|---|
| 5257 |  | 
|---|
| 5258 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5259 | \variable QStyleHintReturn::version | 
|---|
| 5260 | \brief the version of the style hint return container | 
|---|
| 5261 |  | 
|---|
| 5262 | This value can be used by subclasses to implement extensions | 
|---|
| 5263 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast<T>(), you | 
|---|
| 5264 | normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 5265 | */ | 
|---|
| 5266 |  | 
|---|
| 5267 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5268 | Constructs a QStyleHintReturn with version \a version and type \a | 
|---|
| 5269 | type. | 
|---|
| 5270 |  | 
|---|
| 5271 | The version has no special meaning for QStyleHintReturn; it can be | 
|---|
| 5272 | used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of | 
|---|
| 5273 | the same hint type. | 
|---|
| 5274 |  | 
|---|
| 5275 | \sa QStyleOption::version, QStyleOption::type | 
|---|
| 5276 | */ | 
|---|
| 5277 |  | 
|---|
| 5278 | QStyleHintReturn::QStyleHintReturn(int version, int type) | 
|---|
| 5279 | : version(version), type(type) | 
|---|
| 5280 | { | 
|---|
| 5281 | } | 
|---|
| 5282 |  | 
|---|
| 5283 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5284 | \internal | 
|---|
| 5285 | */ | 
|---|
| 5286 |  | 
|---|
| 5287 | QStyleHintReturn::~QStyleHintReturn() | 
|---|
| 5288 | { | 
|---|
| 5289 |  | 
|---|
| 5290 | } | 
|---|
| 5291 |  | 
|---|
| 5292 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5293 | \class QStyleHintReturnMask | 
|---|
| 5294 | \brief The QStyleHintReturnMask class provides style hints that return a QRegion. | 
|---|
| 5295 |  | 
|---|
| 5296 | \ingroup appearance | 
|---|
| 5297 |  | 
|---|
| 5298 | \omit | 
|---|
| 5299 | ### --Sam | 
|---|
| 5300 | \endomit | 
|---|
| 5301 | */ | 
|---|
| 5302 |  | 
|---|
| 5303 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5304 | \variable QStyleHintReturnMask::region | 
|---|
| 5305 | \brief the region for style hints that return a QRegion | 
|---|
| 5306 | */ | 
|---|
| 5307 |  | 
|---|
| 5308 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5309 | Constructs a QStyleHintReturnMask. The member variables are | 
|---|
| 5310 | initialized to default values. | 
|---|
| 5311 | */ | 
|---|
| 5312 | QStyleHintReturnMask::QStyleHintReturnMask() : QStyleHintReturn(Version, Type) | 
|---|
| 5313 | { | 
|---|
| 5314 | } | 
|---|
| 5315 |  | 
|---|
| 5316 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5317 | \enum QStyleHintReturnMask::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5318 |  | 
|---|
| 5319 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5320 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass. | 
|---|
| 5321 |  | 
|---|
| 5322 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SH_Mask} for | 
|---|
| 5323 | this class). | 
|---|
| 5324 |  | 
|---|
| 5325 | The type is used internally by QStyleHintReturn, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 5326 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 5327 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 5328 | create your own QStyleHintReturn subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 5329 |  | 
|---|
| 5330 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5331 | */ | 
|---|
| 5332 |  | 
|---|
| 5333 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5334 | \enum QStyleHintReturnMask::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5335 |  | 
|---|
| 5336 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5337 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass. | 
|---|
| 5338 |  | 
|---|
| 5339 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 5340 |  | 
|---|
| 5341 | The version is used by QStyleHintReturn subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 5342 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 5343 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 5344 |  | 
|---|
| 5345 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5346 | */ | 
|---|
| 5347 |  | 
|---|
| 5348 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5349 | \class QStyleHintReturnVariant | 
|---|
| 5350 | \brief The QStyleHintReturnVariant class provides style hints that return a QVariant. | 
|---|
| 5351 | \since 4.3 | 
|---|
| 5352 | \ingroup appearance | 
|---|
| 5353 | */ | 
|---|
| 5354 |  | 
|---|
| 5355 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5356 | \variable QStyleHintReturnVariant::variant | 
|---|
| 5357 | \brief the variant for style hints that return a QVariant | 
|---|
| 5358 | */ | 
|---|
| 5359 |  | 
|---|
| 5360 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5361 | Constructs a QStyleHintReturnVariant. The member variables are | 
|---|
| 5362 | initialized to default values. | 
|---|
| 5363 | */ | 
|---|
| 5364 | QStyleHintReturnVariant::QStyleHintReturnVariant() : QStyleHintReturn(Version, Type) | 
|---|
| 5365 | { | 
|---|
| 5366 | } | 
|---|
| 5367 |  | 
|---|
| 5368 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5369 | \enum QStyleHintReturnVariant::StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5370 |  | 
|---|
| 5371 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5372 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass. | 
|---|
| 5373 |  | 
|---|
| 5374 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SH_Variant} for | 
|---|
| 5375 | this class). | 
|---|
| 5376 |  | 
|---|
| 5377 | The type is used internally by QStyleHintReturn, its subclasses, and | 
|---|
| 5378 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In | 
|---|
| 5379 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to | 
|---|
| 5380 | create your own QStyleHintReturn subclass and your own styles. | 
|---|
| 5381 |  | 
|---|
| 5382 | \sa StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5383 | */ | 
|---|
| 5384 |  | 
|---|
| 5385 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5386 | \enum QStyleHintReturnVariant::StyleOptionVersion | 
|---|
| 5387 |  | 
|---|
| 5388 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and | 
|---|
| 5389 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass. | 
|---|
| 5390 |  | 
|---|
| 5391 | \value Version 1 | 
|---|
| 5392 |  | 
|---|
| 5393 | The version is used by QStyleHintReturn subclasses to implement | 
|---|
| 5394 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use | 
|---|
| 5395 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it. | 
|---|
| 5396 |  | 
|---|
| 5397 | \sa StyleOptionType | 
|---|
| 5398 | */ | 
|---|
| 5399 |  | 
|---|
| 5400 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5401 | \fn T qstyleoption_cast<T>(const QStyleHintReturn *hint) | 
|---|
| 5402 | \relates QStyleHintReturn | 
|---|
| 5403 |  | 
|---|
| 5404 | Returns a T or 0 depending on the \l{QStyleHintReturn::type}{type} | 
|---|
| 5405 | and \l{QStyleHintReturn::version}{version} of \a hint. | 
|---|
| 5406 |  | 
|---|
| 5407 | Example: | 
|---|
| 5408 |  | 
|---|
| 5409 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_styles_qstyleoption.cpp 0 | 
|---|
| 5410 |  | 
|---|
| 5411 | \sa QStyleHintReturn::type, QStyleHintReturn::version | 
|---|
| 5412 | */ | 
|---|
| 5413 |  | 
|---|
| 5414 | /*! | 
|---|
| 5415 | \fn T qstyleoption_cast<T>(QStyleHintReturn *hint) | 
|---|
| 5416 | \overload | 
|---|
| 5417 | \relates QStyleHintReturn | 
|---|
| 5418 |  | 
|---|
| 5419 | Returns a T or 0 depending on the type of \a hint. | 
|---|
| 5420 | */ | 
|---|
| 5421 |  | 
|---|
| 5422 | #if !defined(QT_NO_DEBUG_STREAM) | 
|---|
| 5423 | QDebug operator<<(QDebug debug, const QStyleOption::OptionType &optionType) | 
|---|
| 5424 | { | 
|---|
| 5425 | #if !defined(QT_NO_DEBUG) | 
|---|
| 5426 | switch (optionType) { | 
|---|
| 5427 | case QStyleOption::SO_Default: | 
|---|
| 5428 | debug << "SO_Default"; break; | 
|---|
| 5429 | case QStyleOption::SO_FocusRect: | 
|---|
| 5430 | debug << "SO_FocusRect"; break; | 
|---|
| 5431 | case QStyleOption::SO_Button: | 
|---|
| 5432 | debug << "SO_Button"; break; | 
|---|
| 5433 | case QStyleOption::SO_Tab: | 
|---|
| 5434 | debug << "SO_Tab"; break; | 
|---|
| 5435 | case QStyleOption::SO_MenuItem: | 
|---|
| 5436 | debug << "SO_MenuItem"; break; | 
|---|
| 5437 | case QStyleOption::SO_Frame: | 
|---|
| 5438 | debug << "SO_Frame"; break; | 
|---|
| 5439 | case QStyleOption::SO_ProgressBar: | 
|---|
| 5440 | debug << "SO_ProgressBar"; break; | 
|---|
| 5441 | case QStyleOption::SO_ToolBox: | 
|---|
| 5442 | debug << "SO_ToolBox"; break; | 
|---|
| 5443 | case QStyleOption::SO_Header: | 
|---|
| 5444 | debug << "SO_Header"; break; | 
|---|
| 5445 | case QStyleOption::SO_Q3DockWindow: | 
|---|
| 5446 | debug << "SO_Q3DockWindow"; break; | 
|---|
| 5447 | case QStyleOption::SO_DockWidget: | 
|---|
| 5448 | debug << "SO_DockWidget"; break; | 
|---|
| 5449 | case QStyleOption::SO_Q3ListViewItem: | 
|---|
| 5450 | debug << "SO_Q3ListViewItem"; break; | 
|---|
| 5451 | case QStyleOption::SO_ViewItem: | 
|---|
| 5452 | debug << "SO_ViewItem"; break; | 
|---|
| 5453 | case QStyleOption::SO_TabWidgetFrame: | 
|---|
| 5454 | debug << "SO_TabWidgetFrame"; break; | 
|---|
| 5455 | case QStyleOption::SO_TabBarBase: | 
|---|
| 5456 | debug << "SO_TabBarBase"; break; | 
|---|
| 5457 | case QStyleOption::SO_RubberBand: | 
|---|
| 5458 | debug << "SO_RubberBand"; break; | 
|---|
| 5459 | case QStyleOption::SO_Complex: | 
|---|
| 5460 | debug << "SO_Complex"; break; | 
|---|
| 5461 | case QStyleOption::SO_Slider: | 
|---|
| 5462 | debug << "SO_Slider"; break; | 
|---|
| 5463 | case QStyleOption::SO_SpinBox: | 
|---|
| 5464 | debug << "SO_SpinBox"; break; | 
|---|
| 5465 | case QStyleOption::SO_ToolButton: | 
|---|
| 5466 | debug << "SO_ToolButton"; break; | 
|---|
| 5467 | case QStyleOption::SO_ComboBox: | 
|---|
| 5468 | debug << "SO_ComboBox"; break; | 
|---|
| 5469 | case QStyleOption::SO_Q3ListView: | 
|---|
| 5470 | debug << "SO_Q3ListView"; break; | 
|---|
| 5471 | case QStyleOption::SO_TitleBar: | 
|---|
| 5472 | debug << "SO_TitleBar"; break; | 
|---|
| 5473 | case QStyleOption::SO_CustomBase: | 
|---|
| 5474 | debug << "SO_CustomBase"; break; | 
|---|
| 5475 | case QStyleOption::SO_GroupBox: | 
|---|
| 5476 | debug << "SO_GroupBox"; break; | 
|---|
| 5477 | case QStyleOption::SO_ToolBar: | 
|---|
| 5478 | debug << "SO_ToolBar"; break; | 
|---|
| 5479 | case QStyleOption::SO_ComplexCustomBase: | 
|---|
| 5480 | debug << "SO_ComplexCustomBase"; break; | 
|---|
| 5481 | case QStyleOption::SO_SizeGrip: | 
|---|
| 5482 | debug << "SO_SizeGrip"; break; | 
|---|
| 5483 | case QStyleOption::SO_GraphicsItem: | 
|---|
| 5484 | debug << "SO_GraphicsItem"; break; | 
|---|
| 5485 | } | 
|---|
| 5486 | #else | 
|---|
| 5487 | Q_UNUSED(optionType); | 
|---|
| 5488 | #endif | 
|---|
| 5489 | return debug; | 
|---|
| 5490 | } | 
|---|
| 5491 |  | 
|---|
| 5492 | QDebug operator<<(QDebug debug, const QStyleOption &option) | 
|---|
| 5493 | { | 
|---|
| 5494 | #if !defined(QT_NO_DEBUG) | 
|---|
| 5495 | debug << "QStyleOption("; | 
|---|
| 5496 | debug << QStyleOption::OptionType(option.type); | 
|---|
| 5497 | debug << ',' << (option.direction == Qt::RightToLeft ? "RightToLeft" : "LeftToRight"); | 
|---|
| 5498 | debug << ',' << option.state; | 
|---|
| 5499 | debug << ',' << option.rect; | 
|---|
| 5500 | debug << ')'; | 
|---|
| 5501 | #else | 
|---|
| 5502 | Q_UNUSED(option); | 
|---|
| 5503 | #endif | 
|---|
| 5504 | return debug; | 
|---|
| 5505 | } | 
|---|
| 5506 | #endif | 
|---|
| 5507 |  | 
|---|
| 5508 | QT_END_NAMESPACE | 
|---|